Yamaha YSP-4100 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: YSP-4100

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

English

for Europe, Asia, Africa, Oceania,

and Latin America

Owner’s Manual

Digital Sound Projector

2 En

The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of Yamaha

Corporation.

The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of

Yamaha Corporation.

The “ ” and “UniVolume” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.

The “ ” and “AirWired” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS

logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. ©

Manufactured under license from Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. Worldwide

patents applied for.

The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector

™

” are trademarks of

Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a trademark.

iPod™, iPhone™

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.

“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to

connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to

connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory standards.

About this manual

• Make sure you read precautions in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet) carefully before using this unit.

• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the

supplied owner’s manual for each component.

• Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• An illustration of the remote control in the left pages of this manual indicates the keys to be used in two facing (left and right) pages.

• This manual is produced prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements,

etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.

3 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

Features........................................................................... 4

General operation flow .................................................. 5

Controls and functions................................................... 6

Front panel .........................................................................6

Front panel display.............................................................7

Rear panel...........................................................................8

Remote control ...................................................................9

Installation .................................................................... 10

Connections................................................................... 12

Before connecting components........................................12

Connecting external components .....................................12

Connecting a subwoofer...................................................13

Connecting the FM antenna .............................................14

Preparing the remote control...................................... 14

Installing batteries in the remote control..........................14

Operation range of the remote control .............................14

Changing OSD language.............................................. 15

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)....................................... 15

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone.............................15

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ................................16

Using the system memory............................................ 19

Saving settings .................................................................19

Loading settings ...............................................................19

Playback ........................................................................ 21

Playing back sources........................................................21

Playing back TV sounds...................................................21

Playing back a player .......................................................21

Muting audio output.........................................................21

Decoder and input channel indicators..............................21

Playback mode.............................................................. 22

Selecting surround or stereo playback .............................22

Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs..................................22

Changing the audio output method for surround

playback........................................................................23

Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...............24

Playing back 5.1-channel sources in

7.1-channel surround....................................................24

FM tuning ..................................................................... 25

Tuning into the desired FM station

(Frequency tuning) .......................................................25

Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).....25

Displaying the Radio Data System information

(Europe model only).....................................................26

Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 27

Useful features .............................................................. 28

Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume).......28

Using the HDMI™ control function ................................28

Using the sleep timer........................................................28

Configuring settings for each input source

(Option menu) ..............................................................28

Displaying the input signal information...........................29

Customizing this unit (SET MENU)........................... 30

SET MENU items............................................................ 30

Basic SET MENU operation............................................ 31

MANUAL SETUP........................................................... 31

SOUND SET MENU....................................................... 33

SOUND OUT MENU...................................................... 34

INPUT MENU................................................................. 35

DISPLAY MENU............................................................ 36

System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) ......... 37

Using an external amplifier......................................... 38

Controlling external components ............................... 39

Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40

Glossary......................................................................... 43

Specifications ................................................................ 44

List of remote control codes ........................................ 45

Index.............................................................................. 52

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

PLAYBACK FEATURES

SETTINGS

APPENDIX

4 En

INTRODUCTION

Digital Sound Projector

The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to

control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-

channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite

loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional

surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that

let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo+3 Beam, 3 Beam

for 5.1-channel audio, 5 Beam plus 2, Stereo + 3 Beam plus 2, 3

Beam for 7.1-channel audio) and 2-channel stereo playback.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI input x 4, HDMI output x 1

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video

(including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel

digital audio based on HDCP

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information

capability

– Deep Color video signal transmission capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

– Multi-channel Linear PCM signal capability

◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components

◆ Functional link which enables the remote control of your TV to control

this unit (with an HDMI control-compatible TV)

– Power mode switch capability (on/standby)

– Volume adjustment capability

– TV sounds reproduce device selection capability (this unit/TV)

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic

optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker

setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best

match your listening environment.

Cinema DSP

This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha

Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the

original dramatic sound impact.

UniVolume

This unit employs the automatic volume adjustment function. You

can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase

suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to

commercials, etc.).

Various digital audio decoders includes newly added HD

audio decoder, and sound technologies

◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby digital Surround EX, Dolby

Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, Pro Logic IIx

◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS 96/24,

DTS-ES, DTS, DTS-ES (discrete and matrix), DTS Neo: 6

◆ Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts

such as the MP3 format

◆ Bass Extension to produce powerful bass sounds

Sophisticated FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

Radio Data System (Europe model only)

This unit employs the Radio Data System that is a data transmission

system used by FM stations.

Wireless connection (AirWired)

◆ Wireless connection with iPod/iPhone, using Yamaha wireless transmitter

for iPod (PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC)

◆ Wireless connection with subwoofer, using Yamaha wireless subwoofer

kit (SWK-W10) (not available in some countries)

◆ iPod/iPhone interlock feature to turn on/off this unit or switch the input

source in conjunction with iPod/iPhone operations

Versatile Remote Control

The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes

used to control external components connected to this unit.

Features

5 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

1 Install this unit and connect to other components.

“Installation” (page 10), “Connections” (page 12).

2 Run AUTO SETUP to optimize the beam and sound settings.

“AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” (page 15).

3 Play back a source.

“Playback” (page 21).

4 Change the playback method (surround/stereo), CINEMA DSP and/or beam modes settings.

“Playback mode” (page 22).

5 Configure this unit’s settings and/or set remote control codes.

“Customizing this unit (SET MENU)” (page 30), “Controlling external components” (page 39).

General operation flow

6 En

1 Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control (page 14).

2 Power LED

Lights up when the power is turned on (page 21).

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this unit (page 7).

4 INPUT

Press repeatedly to switch between input sources.

5 VOLUME +/–

Controls the volume level of all audio channels.

Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum)

6 Power (p) key

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode

(page 21).

Note

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to

receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI

signals.

7 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP

(page 15).

Controls and functions

Front panel

INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC

64 7

321

7 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

1 UNIVOLUME indicator

Lights up when the UniVolume function is turned on (page 28).

2 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program is selected (page 22).

3 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input from

the HDMI IN jack(s).

4 Tuner indicators

Light up when this unit is tuned into an FM station (page 25).

5 Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only)

Show the current Radio Data System status (page 26).

6 Wireless indicators

TRNS Lights up when a wireless connection is established

between the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-

W10) and this unit (page 13).

RECV Lights up when a wireless connection is established

between the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX-

50TX) and this unit (page 27).

7 Decoder indicators

Light up when the corresponding decoder operates

(page 21).

8 SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is set (page 28).

9 Volume level indicator

Displays the current volume level.

0 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (page 34).

A BASS EXT indicator

Lights up when the bass extension mode is turned on (page 34).

B PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

C Multi-information display

Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the

parameters of this unit. Current input source and audio output method

are displayed when this unit is turned on.

D Input channel indicators

The channel component of the current input signal is displayed

(page 21).

Front panel display

L C R

SL SB SR

EX1 LFE EX2

AUTO

UNIVOLUME

ENHANCER

BASS EXT

MEMORY

PS PTY RT CT

PCM

ES DSCRT MTRX

SLEEP

VOL

TUNED STEREO

RECVTRNS

HD MSTR HI

RES

Neo:6

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

64 5 78921 3

CA0 B

8 En

Note

• The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this

unit.

1 HDMI jacks

Connect your HDMI components (page 12).

2 FM ANTENNA jack

Connect the FM antenna (page 14).

3 VIDEO jacks

Connect to the video jacks of your external components (page 12).

4 SUBWOOFER jack

Connect your subwoofer (page 13).

5 AUDIO IN jacks

Connect to the analog audio output jacks of your external

components (page 12).

6 DIGITAL IN jacks

Connect to the digital audio output jacks of your external components

(page 12).

7 IR IN terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.

8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal

Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM

CONNECTOR terminal to this unit (page 13).

9 RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.

0 AC IN

Connect the supplied power cable (page 12).

A IR-OUT terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only.

B PRE OUT jacks

Connect your external amplifier (page 38).

Rear panel

AUX 1 TV

OUT

HDMI

AUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN

FRONT

PRE OUT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

IR IN

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUB

WOOFER

COMPONENT

DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO

RS-232C

VIDEOVIDEO

R PB

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

IR-OUT

AC IN

IR-OUT

OUT

HDMI

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

FM ANTENNA

FRONT

PRE OUT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

AUX 1 TVAUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN

IR IN

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUB

WOOFER

COMPONENT

DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO

RS-232C

93 5 6

4 8

9 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

Note

• When operating the keys located on the slide cover (INFO, SLEEP, etc.),

close the slide cover completely before operation.

A Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

B TV (p)

Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode

(page 39).

B AV (p)

Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby

mode (page 39).

C Power (p) key

Turns on the power of this unit or set it to the standby mode

(page 21).

D Input selector keys

Use to select an input source (page 21). An input source key currently

selected lights up when the remote control is operated.

E CINEMA DSP program keys

Select the CINEMA DSP programs (page 22).

F SURROUND/STEREO

Switches between surround and stereo playback (page 22).

G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER

Select and adjust menu items.

H TOP MENU

Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39).

H MENU

Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39).

I OPTION

Displays the option menu (page 28). The remote control turns to

setting mode (ISETUP lights up).

I SETUP

Displays the SETUP menu (page 30). Press and hold to directly enter

the LANGUAGE SETUP menu (page 15). Lights up when the

remote control is turned into the setting mode of the main unit.

I RETURN

Returns to the previous menu screen (page 31).

J CH /

Changes the channels of your TV/recorder (page 39).

K VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (page 21).

K MUTE

Mutes the sound. (page 21).

L TV operation keys

Use to control your TV (page 39).

M UNIVOLUME

Turns on or off the UniVolume function (page 28).

M SUR.DECODE

Selects a decoder for surround playback (page 24). The remote

control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up).

M INTELLIBEAM

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (page 16). The remote control turns

to setting mode (ISETUP lights up).

N Numeric keys

Use to enter numbers.

O CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations

(page 39).

P Tuner / external component operation keys

Use to select or preset an FM station or control playback of your

external components (pages 25 and 39).

Q SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (page 28).

R INFO

Displays information about signals currently input to this unit

(page 29). Select the desired Radio Data System display mode

(Europe model only) (page 26).

Remote control

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

10 En

PREPARATION

This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. To

achieve desired surround sound effects, install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams

(page 11). Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (page 12) should be done before installation.

Notes

• Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat

can escape. We recommend installing this unit using a wall mount bracket, a

rack, a table top stand or a floor stand.

• Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as

from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.

• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly

above your TV.

• If the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we

recommend moving this unit away from your TV.

■ Attach the stands

Attach the supplied stands to this unit as shown below. Make sure that

you attach the left and right stands correctly. These stands are

unnecessary if you use the optional wall mount bracket.

Note

• Depending on a rack, table top stand, or floor stand, the stands may not be

necessary.

■ Using a rack

You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a

commercially available rack.

It should be large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around

this unit and strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and

your TV.

■ Using a wall mount bracket

You can use the optional wall mount bracket (such as SPM-K30) to

mount this unit on the wall in your listening room.

Attachment of the wall mount bracket: refer to the owner’s manual

supplied with the wall mount bracket.

■ Using a table top stand or a floor stand

You can mount both your TV and this unit on a commercially

available table top stand or floor stand.

Installation

Screws (for stands, supplied)

Left stand (supplied)

Right stand (supplied)

This unit

When this unit is installed above your TV

When this unit is installed under your TV

112

730

235 355 235355

112

4- 7

24- 7x22

150 355 150355

24- 7x22

107

(mm)

This unit

Wall mount bracket

YSP-5100

SPM-K30 (Option)

YSP-4100

Dimensions when using SPM-K30

11 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

■ Ideal installation condition

■ For better listening environment

Example 1

Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.

Example 2

Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.

Example 3

Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.

: Object such as furniture

Parallel installation (with 5 Beam)

Corner installation (with Stereo+3Beam)

40° to 50°

12 En

■ Cables used for connections

The symbols on the left of cable names (such as , , and )

correspond with the symbols described in “Connecting your TV and

Blu-ray disc player” (page 12) and “Connecting audio video

components” (page 13).

For audio and video

HDMI cable

For audio

Audio pin cable (supplied)

Optical cable (supplied)

Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

For video

Video pin cable (supplied)

Component video pin cable

■ Information on HDMI

An HDMI cable can transmit both audio and video signals at the

same time. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use

HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections.

See also: “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28), “INPUT

MENU” (page 35)

• This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals

from the HDMI OUT jack.

• The HDMI of this unit supports High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection

(HDCP),

• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with

the HDMI logo printed on it.

■ Priority order for audio input signals

When digital and analog audio signals are simultaneously input from

a single source component, this unit plays back digital audio signals

by priority. For example, if audio signals are input to the DIGITAL

IN (AUX 1) and AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks simultaneously, this unit

plays back audio signals input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack

when “AUX1” is selected as the input source.

Connect external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) to this unit. Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

■ Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player

The following connection example shows a way to connect your TV and Blu-ray disc player by using the HDMI jacks. When you connect them

by using the other jacks, refer to “Connecting audio and video components” (page 13). The symbols beside the cables correspond with the

symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12).

Connections

Before connecting components

Input source Audio signal type

Blu-ray disc

HD DVD

Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,

DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD

Master Audio, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM

DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel

PCM

DVD audio 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM

Connecting external components

Optical digital

output

HDMI

output

HDMI

input

OUT

HDMI

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

AUX 1 TVAUX 2

DIGITAL IN

Power cable

to AC wall outlet

1. Pull out the cap

(if attached)

2. Check the direction

Blu-ray disc player

13 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

■ Connecting audio and video components

Determine the connection types depending on the jacks available on this unit and your external components. The symbols in the following table

correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12).

• Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (VIDEO) jack can be output not only to the VIDEO OUT jack but also the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals input from

the VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) jacks are output to the HDMI OUT jack.

Wireline connection

Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the

SUBWOOFER jack on this unit.

• If the subwoofer is connected by using a system type connection, changing

the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer

(Yamaha subwoofer).

Wireless connection

You can make a wireless connection of your subwoofer by using the

Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10). About SWK-W10,

refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet).

See also: “WIRELESS SETUP” (page 36)

• For proper transmission, you need to set the group IDs of this unit and

SWK-W10 to the same value. For the Group ID settings, refer to “Group

ID” (page 36) and “Safety and Accessory Information (separate booklet)”.

Note

• Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased.

External component Signal type

Jacks to use

Cable to

use

Input selection

key

On external component On this unit

TV Video Composite video input VIDEO OUT

Audio Analog audio output AUDIO IN (TV) TV

External component

with HDMI output

Audio/video HDMI output HDMI IN 1-4 HDMI1-4

External component

with component video

output

Audio Coaxial digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) AUX2

Video Component video output VIDEO IN (COMPONENT)

External component

with composite video

output

Audio Optical digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) AUX1

Analog audio output AUDIO IN (AUX 1)

Video Composite video output VIDEO IN (VIDEO)

Connecting a subwoofer

AUX 1 TV

HDMI

AUX 2AUX 1 TVOUTIN

IR IN

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUB

WOOFER

COMPONENT

DIGITAL INAUDI O INVIDEO

RS-232C

VIDEOVIDEO

R PB

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

DIGITAL INAUDIO INVIDEO

VIDEO IN/OUT

jacks

AUDIO IN

jacks

DIGITAL IN

jacks

HDMI IN

jacks

AUX 1 TVAUX 2AUX 1 TVOUT

IR IN

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUB

WOOFER

DIGITAL INAUDIO IN

RS-232C

Monaural input System connector

INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC

SWK-W10

Subwoofer

14 En

Connect the supplied FM antenna or your antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit.

Note

• Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make

sure that you read precautions on the remote control and

batteries in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate

booklet).

1 Pull and hold the tab on the battery cover

and then open the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (R03P, UM4,

AAA) into the battery compartment.

Make sure you insert the batteries according to the

polarity markings (+/–).

3 Close the battery cover.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and

point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit

during operation.

Connecting the FM antenna

Preparing the remote control

FM ANTENNA

Antenna

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Pull and hold

Operation range of the remote

control

INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC

Within

6m (20ft)

30° 30°

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

GENTER

G /

ISETUP

15 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Changing OSD

language

AUTO SETUP

(IntelliBeam)

Using the system

memory

SETTINGS

You can select an OSD language among English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch and Russian. Before operating

the following steps, select this unit as the video input on your TV.

1 Press and hold ISETUP until the

“LANGUAGE SETUP” menu appears on your

TV.

2 Press G / to select the desired

language and then press GENTER.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),

ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),

Русский (Russian)

Initial setting: ENGLISH (English)

3 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP.

This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams off the walls of your listening room and by broadening the

cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the

beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.

Notes

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.

• The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep the IntelliBeam microphone away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of this unit.

• You cannot use the AUTO SETUP when “PREOUT” is selected in “SOUND OUT” (page 35).

• You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback

and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. About PDX-50TX, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate

booklet).

Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam

microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location.

1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on

the front panel.

2 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat

level surface at your normal listening

position.

Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended

center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more

away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam

microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from

the center height of this unit.

• Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod

to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as

your ears would be when you are seated.

Changing OSD language

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

Francais

ESPANOL

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

3)LANGUAGE SETUP

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

Installing the IntelliBeam

microphone

INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC

INTELLIBEAM MIC

IntelliBeam microphone

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

or more

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

Cardboard

microphone stand

Listening

position

Upper limit

Lower limit

Center height of

this unit

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

IntelliBeam

microphone

Cardboard

microphone

stand

Center line

16 En

■ Assembling the supplied cardboard

microphone stand

• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover frequency

controls is connected to this unit, turn it on, set the volume to

about half way and then set the crossover frequency to the

maximum as shown below.

You can select one of the following AUTO SETUP types

depending on your purpose.

“BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ”

“BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”

“SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”

Notes

• It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO

SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around

in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. For

accurate measurement, turn off air conditioner or other devices

that make noises.

• To achieve the best results possible, vacate your listening room

until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may

not obstruct the path of sound beams.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend

following the procedure below.

1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.

2. Run “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”.

3. Close the curtains.

4. Run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press

IRETURN.

1 Press ISETUP.

The remote control keys to be used and available

operations in each step are displayed at the bottom of

the screen.

• You can also start the “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ”

procedure simply by holding down MINTELLIBEAM for

more than two seconds. In this case, proceed to step 4.

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

(Beam optimization and sound optimization)

Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and

quality so that the parameters best match your listening

environment. It is recommended that you should select

this optimization feature in the following cases:

• If you make settings for the first time

• If the unit has been relocated

• If your listening room has been restructured

• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)

have been rearranged

This menu takes about three minutes.

Remove

Fit in

Place horizontally

Run through

VOLUME

MIN MAX MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Subwoofer

(Beam optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter

best matches your listening environment.

This menu takes about one minute.

(Sound optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so

that the parameters best match your listening

environment. You must optimize the beam angle with

“BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” before starting “SOUND

OPTIMZ ONLY”. It is recommended that you should

select this optimization feature in the following cases:

• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your

listening room before using this unit

• If you have manually set the beam angle.

This menu takes about three minutes.

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SOUND SET MENU

;SOUND OUT MENU

;INPUT MENU

;DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

GENTER

G /

IRETURN

ISETUP

MINTELLIBEAM

17 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Changing OSD

language

AUTO SETUP

(IntelliBeam)

Using the system

memory

SETTINGS

2 Press G / to select “AUTO SETUP” and

then press GENTER.

3 Press G / to select “BEAM+SOUND

OPTIMZ”, “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” or “SOUND

OPTIMZ ONLY” and then press GENTER.

4 Prepare to leave the room.

The best setting may not be done if you are in the

room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after

pressing GENTER in step 5.

• Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.

• To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,

press IRETURN.

5 Press GENTER to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure and then leave the room within 10

seconds.

The setup screen automatically changes during the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

If an error occurs, an error buzzer sounds and an error

message is displayed. For details on error messages,

see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18).

If the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, this unit

rings the chimes.

• If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed,

refer to “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18),

press IRETURN, and then run the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

• If “SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed

even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit and

turned on, check the connection and then increase the

volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

• Depending on the environment of your listening room, the

beam angles of front right and left and surround left and

right may be set to the same value even if “BEAM MODE

:5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.

6 Press GENTER to confirm the results.

The menu screen disappears in two seconds.

• If you do not want to reflect the results, press IRETURN.

7 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.

The measurement results are stored in the internal

memory of this unit until you run the AUTO SETUP

procedure again or configure the settings manually.

1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

2)BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY

3)SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

B)AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the unit.

The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

*--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5Beam/Plus2

SUBWOOFER :YES

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

XXXXXXXXSHOW RESULTXXXXXXXXXX

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the unit and the listening

position.

INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC

18 En

■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP

If an error message is displayed on your TV, check the error message list to solve the problem and then follow the

procedure below.

[ERROR E-1]: Press GENTER to run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or IRETURN to cancel the operation

Other errors: Press IRETURN to cancel the operation and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again.

Note

If the problem is difficult to be solved, configure the settings manually in “MANUAL SETUP” (page 31).

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-1

Please test in quieter environment.

There is too much unwanted noise in

your listening room.

Make sure that your listening room is as

quiet as possible. You may want to

choose certain hours during the day

when there is not much noise coming

from outside.

—

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

connected to this unit or disconnected

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to

this unit firmly.

ERROR E-3

Unexpected control is detected.

Please re-try.

Some other operations were performed

on this unit while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Do not perform any other operations

while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

—

ERROR E-4

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set in front of the unit

and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in front of this unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed in front of this

unit.

ERROR E-5

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft and

re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in the right distance from this

unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed more than 1.8 m

(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and

within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height

of this unit.

ERROR E-6

Volume level is lower than

expected. Please check MIC

position/connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone cannot

collect the sound produced by this unit

because the sound output level is too low.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit and placed in a proper location. If

the problem persists, contact the nearest

authorized Yamaha service center for

assistance.

ERROR E-7

Unexpected error happened.

Please re-try.

An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.

—

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

GENTER

G /

IRETURN

ISETUP

19 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Changing OSD

language

AUTO SETUP

(IntelliBeam)

Using the system

memory

SETTINGS

You can save the current beam and sound settings in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings

according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound

beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below.

1. While the curtains are open, run “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY1”.

2. While the curtains are closed, run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY2”.

1 Press ISETUP.

2 Press GENTER.

3 Press G / to select “SAVE” and then

press GENTER.

4 Press G / to select the desired

memory number and then press GENTER.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old settings.

5 Press GENTER.

The current beam and sound settings are saved to the

selected memory number.

1 Press ISETUP.

2 Press GENTER.

3 Press GENTER again.

Using the system memory

Saving settings

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SOUND SET MENU

;SOUND OUT MENU

;INPUT MENU

;DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A)MEMORY

a)MEMORY1

b)MEMORY2

c)MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

2)MEMORY SAVE

MEMORY1 Save Now?

[ENTER]:Enter

2)MEMORY SAVE

Loading settings

MEMORY1 Saving...

2)MEMORY SAVE

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SOUND SET MENU

;SOUND OUT MENU

;INPUT MENU

;DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A)MEMORY

a)MEMORY1

b)MEMORY2

c)MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY LOAD

20 En

4 Press G / to select the memory

number to be loaded and then press

GENTER.

5 Press GENTER.

The beam and sound settings saved in the selected

memory number are loaded.

MEMORY1 Load Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Load

1)MEMORY LOAD

MEMORY1 Loading...

1)MEMORY LOAD

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

ENTER

MUTE

HDMI 4 iPod

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

CPower

DAUX1/2

DHDMI1

DHDMI1-4

DInput selector keys

DTV

GENTER

G /

KMUTE

KVOLUME +/–

21 En

INTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Playback

Playback mode

FM tuning

Playing back iPod™

Useful features

PREPARATION

Changing OSD

language

AUTO SETUP

(IntelliBeam)

Using the system

memory

PLAYBACK FEATURES

This section describes how to playback source input from

your external components. For details on your external

components, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with

each component.

1 Press CPower (p) key to turn on this unit.

2 Turn on external components (TV, Blu-ray

disc player, etc.) connected to this unit.

3 Press one of the DInput selector keys to

select an external component as an input

source.

• You can change the input source name displayed on the

front panel display (page 35).

4 Start playback of the external component

that you have selected as the input source,

or select a radio station on the tuner.

• FM tuning (page 25)

• Playing back iPod/iPhone (page 27)

5 Press KVOLUME +/– to adjust the volume.

6 Press CPower (p) key to turn this unit to the

standby mode.

1 Select the desired TV channel.

2 Press DTV to select the TV as the input

source.

3 Mute the sound output on the TV.

1 Select the player as the video input on the TV.

2 Press DHDMI1-4 or DAUX1/2 to select the

player as the input source.

For example, if the player is connected to the HDMI

IN 1 jack of this unit, press DHDMI1.

3 Start playback of the player.

4 Mute the sound output on the TV.

• If your player supports the HD audio, check whether the audio

output setting on the player is set to the value which supports

HD audio output (“Auto”, “Bitstream”, etc.).

• If your player does not support the HD audio, check whether the

audio output setting on the player is set to multi-channel linear

PCM.

• If your player is connected to this unit through the digital

connection, check whether the audio output setting on the

player is set to digital output (“Bitstream”, “Dolby Digital”,

“DTS”, etc.).

• To enhance the surround sound effect, set the audio setting of

your player to the multi-channel audio mode.

• You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the

digital signals being input from the player through the digital

connection (HDMI, optical or coaxial). The

indicator lights up when this unit detects the digital audio signal

input.

1 Press KMUTE to mute the audio output.

2 Press KMUTE again to resume audio output.

■ Decoder indicators

Depending on the input source and the selected decoder,

the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows:

Playback

Playing back sources

Playing back TV sounds

HDMI1

Input source name

Volume 40

Volume

Playing back a player

Muting audio output

Decoder and input channel

indicators

DIGITAL

22 En

• You can select an audio signal to be played back (Auto or DTS)

In “Decoder Mode” (page 29).

■ Input channel indicators

Depending on the channel component of the current

digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the

front panel display light up as follows:

• Extra (EX1/EX2) indicators light up when 7.1-channnel signals

recorded in a Blu-lay disc (etc.) are being input. Normally,

surround back channel signals are recorded in the extra

channels. This may vary depending on the disc.

You can select the playback method (surround or stereo), desired CINEMA DSP program and decoder to enjoy playback

of the input source.

Use to select the playback method (surround or stereo).

See also: “ Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs” (page 22),

“Changing the audio output method for surround

playback” (page 23).

Press FSURROUND or FSTEREO.

You can enjoy high realistic sensation with surround

playback and hi-fi sound with stereo playback.

• Normal sounds (not sound beams) are output from the front

right and front left channels. When you play back multi-channel

sources, all signals except those from the front right and left

channels are mixed down and output from the front right and

left channels.

• When the stereo playback is selected, CINEMA DSP (page 22)

and the decoder (page 24) become ineffective.

This unit is equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP

(digital sound field processing) chip containing several

sound field programs used to enhance your playback

experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are

precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments

of famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

• When you enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs, press F

SURROUND to select the surround playback, and then follow

the steps below.

• The CINEMA DSP programs are not available in the following

conditions.

– Stereo playback is selected.

– HD audio signals are being played back.

– Audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz

are being played back.

– Audio signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks.

Status Indicator

When PCM signals are being

input

When Dolby TrueHD signals are

being input

When Dolby Digital Plus signals

are being input

When Dolby Digital signals are

being input

When Dolby Pro Logic is

selected as the surround decoder

When Dolby Pro Logic II is

selected as the surround decoder

When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is

selected as the surround decoder

When DTS HD Master Audio

signals are being input

+ HD + MSTR

When DTS HD High Resolution

signals are being input

+ HD + HI RES

When DTS digital signals are

being input

When DTS 96/24 signals are

being input

When DTS ES discrete is

selected as the surround decoder

+ ES + DSCRT

When DTS ES matrix is selected

as the surround decoder

+ ES + MTRX

When DTS Neo:6 is selected as

the surround decoder

+ Neo:6

PCM

DIGITAL

Input signal Indicator

2-channel stereo

5.1-channel

6.1-channel

7.1-channel

L C R

SL SB SR

EX1 LFE EX2

Center

Front L

Surround L

Extra 1

Surround back

Front R

Surround R

Extra 2

LFE

Playback mode

Selecting surround or stereo

playback

Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs

ECINEMA DSP

EOFF

FSTEREO

FSURROUND

GENTER

G /

ISETUP

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

23 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Playback

Playback mode

FM tuning

Playing back iPod™

Useful features

1 Press the desired ECINEMA DSP key.

The CINEMA DSP category name appears in the

front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator

(page 7) lights up.

2 While the category name is displayed, press

the ECINEMA DSP key repeatedly.

Each time you press the key, program switches.

• To turn off the CINEMA DSP program, press

EOFF.

■ Movie (MOVIE)

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special

sound effects of the latest science fiction films and lets

you feel a broad and expansive cinematic space.

Adventure

This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the

latest action films and lets you feel the dynamic and

excitement of fast-moving scenes.

Spectacle

This program reproduces the wide and grand environment

and lets you have added impressions on spectacular scenes

with strong visual impacts.

■ Music (MUSIC)

Music Video

This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you

feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

Concert Hall

This program creates a rich surround effect of a large

round concert hall with a great deal of presence,

emphasizing the extension of sounds, and lets you feel as

if you are seated close to the center of the stage.

Jazz Club

This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The

Bottom Line”, a famous jazz club in New York once and

lets you feel as if you are seated right in front of the stage.

■ Entertainment (ENTERTAINMENT)

Sports

This program reproduces the energetic environment of live

sports broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on

the center and broadening the overall atmosphere of the

stadium, and lets you feel as if you are seated at an actual

stadium or a ball park.

Talk Show

This program reproduces excitement of live talk shows. It

enhances the ambience of gaiety while keeping the

conversations at a comfortable volume.

Drama

This program stables reverberations that match a wide

range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals

and comedies, and offers an optimum 3D feeling,

reproducing effects tones and background music softly but

cubically around clear words.

Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure

games. It utilizes the sound field effects for movies to

represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during

play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

Mch Stereo

This program downmixes multi-channel source to 2

channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers and

produces stereo sounds in wide range. It is ideal for

background music at parties, etc.

You can set the number of beam output channels and

audio output method.

1 Press ISETUP.

The “SET MENU” screen appears on the TV.

2 Use G / and GENTER to select

“SOUND OUT MENU”- “SOUND BEAM OUT

CONFIG” - “CHANNEL OUT”.

3 Press G / to select the number of output

channels.

Choices: 5.1ch, 7.1ch

Initial setting: 7.1ch

4 Press G to select “BEAM MODE”.

5 Press G to select the desired audio

output method.

6 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP.

■ Beam modes for “5.1ch”

5 Beam

Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center,

and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal

for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when

you watch 5.1-channel audio discs.

Stereo+3Beam

Outputs normal sound from the front right and left

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

right and left channels. This mode is ideal for watching

live recordings on a DVD.

Changing the audio output method

for surround playback

24 En

3 Beam

Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and

center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources,

surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the

front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for

enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you

can use this mode when the listening position is close to

the backside of the wall.

■ Beam modes for “7.1ch”

5Beam Plus2

Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center,

and surround back right and left channels. Surround right

and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and

left and surround back right and left channels. This mode

is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest

when you watch 7.1-channel audio discs.

ST+3BeamPlus2

Outputs normal sound from the front right and left

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

back right and left channels. Surround right and left

channel sounds are output by using front right and left

channel sound and surround back right and left sound

beams. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on

a DVD.

3 Beam

Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and

center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources,

surround right and left and surround back right and left

channel sources are mixed into the front right and left

channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the

whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the

listening position is close to the backside of the wall.

This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 7.1-channel or

5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of

surround sound effects by switching the decoder.

• The decoders are available only when surround playback

(page 22) is selected.

• Available decoders vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT”

setting (page 23).

Press MSUR.DECODE repeatedly to switch

between decoders.

2ch → 5ch

2ch → 7ch

This unit decodes 5.1-channel sources and then playback

them in up to 7.1-channel surround. One of the following

decoders is automatically selected depending on the input

signals. Set “CHANNEL OUT” to “7.1ch” (

page 23).

• Press MSUR.DECODE to switch between Dolby Pro Logic

Movie and Music. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

decoder, select “PLIIxMusic”. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder, select one of the decoders other than

“PLIIxMusic”.

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound

Decoder

Recommended

source

Pro Logic

(Dolby Pro Logic)

— All sources

PLII

(Dolby Pro Logic II)

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

Neo:6

(DTS Neo:6)

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Decoder

Recommended

source

PLIIx

(Dolby Pro Logic

IIx)

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

Neo:6

(DTS Neo:6)

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Playing back 5.1-channel sources

in 7.1-channel surround

5.1ch input source Decoder

PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie/

Music

DTS Digital, DTS ES matrix,

DTS HD Master Audio, DTS

HD High Resolution Audio

DTS ES matrix

DTS ES discrete DTS ES discrete

DRADIO

GENTER

G /

IOPTION

IRETURN

MSUR.DECODE

NNumeric keys

PTUNING /

PMEMORY

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

HDMI 4 iPod

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

MEMORY

25 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION SETTINGS APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES

Playback

Playback mode

FM tuning

Playing back iPod™

Useful features

The FM tuner of this unit provides the following two

modes for tuning.

• Frequency tuning mode

You can tune into a desired FM station by searching or

specifying its frequency.

• Preset tuning mode

You can preset the frequencies of FM stations by

registering them to specific numbers, and later just

select those numbers to tune into.

Note

Adjust the FM antenna connected to this unit for the best

reception.

1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the

input source.

Note

• If you select “FM” with INPUT on the front panel, press

DFM on the remote control prior to step 2 so that you can

operate the procedures from step 2.

2 Press PTUNING / to specify the

frequency.

The TUNED indicator on the front panel display

lights up when the tuner is tuned into a station. The

STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being

broadcasted is in stereo.

See also: “AUDIO SELECT” (page 36)

• Press G to proceed to the next page.

AUDIO1

Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (TV) jacks are

assigned.

Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,

HDMI4

Note

• The input already selected in “AUDIO2” is not displayed. To set

the input selected in “AUDIO2”, change “AUDIO2” parameter,

and then reconfigure.

AUDIO2

Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks are

assigned.

Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,

HDMI4, TV

Note

• The input already selected in “AUDIO1” is not displayed. To set

the input selected in “AUDIO1”, change “AUDIO1” parameter,

and then reconfigure.

OPTICAL1

Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (TV) jack is

assigned.

Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,

HDMI4

Note

• The input already selected in “OPTICAL2” or “COAX” is not

displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters,

change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure.

OPTICAL2

Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack is

assigned.

Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3,

HDMI4, TV

Note

• The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “COAX” is not

displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters,

change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure.

COAX

Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) jack is

assigned.

Choices: AUX2*, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV,

AUX1

Note

• The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “OPTICAL2” is

not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these

parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then

reconfigure.

■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)

SET MENU → INPUT MENU → INPUT RENAME

Use to change the name of the input source displayed

when the input source is selected. Select a name from

templates, or enter an original name.

Selecting a name from templates

1 Press G / to select the input source to

be renamed.

INPUT MENU

36 En

2 Press G / to select a input source name.

Choices: TV, Blu-ray, DVD, HDDVD, STB, Satelite,

Game

3 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN.

Entering an original name

1 Press G / to select the input source to

be renamed.

2 Press GENTER.

“ ” appears above the new name display to indicate

the position to be entered.

3 Press G / to place the _ (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

4 Press G / to select the desired

character.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit other characters.

6 To complete the setting, press GENTER.

7 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN.

• A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, and symbols (!, ?, <, >, etc.) are available

for input.

■ HDMI SETUP (HDMI setup)

SET MENU → INPUT MENU → HDMI SETUP

Use to configure the settings related to HDMI signals and

HDMI control function.

SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio)

Use to select a component to play back HDMI audio

signals. This setting is effective only when “HDMI

CONTROL” is set to “OFF”.

• HDMI video signals input to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this

unit are always output from the HDMI OUT jack.

Choices: (Model name of this unit)*, OTHER

• Select this unit to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit.

• Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on the

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

AUDIO SELECT (Audio select)

Select whether or not to output HDMI audio signals input

to each HDMI IN jacks. This function is useful when you

want to enjoy another audio input source while watching

HDMI video sources. For example, if you set “HDMI1” of

“AUDIO SELECT” to “OFF” and “OPTICAL1” of

“INPUT ASSIGNMENT” to “HDMI1” (page 35), you

can enjoy the audio source input to the DIGITAL IN

(AUX 1) jack while watching the HDMI video source

input to HDMI IN 1 jack.

Choices: OFF, ON*

HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)

Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI control-

compatible TV via HDMI. For details, see “Using the

HDMI control function” (page 28).

Choices: OFF*, ON

• Select OFF to turn off the HDMI control function. The

standby consumption power of this unit decreases.

• Select ON to turn off the HDMI control function.

■ WIRELESS SETUP (Wireless setup)

SET MENU → INPUT MENU → WIRELESS SETUP

Use to configure the wireless connection between this unit

and PDX-50TX or SWK-W10.

Wireless Function (Wireless function)

Select whether or not to use the wireless function of this

unit.

Choices: No, Yes*

• Select No to disable the wireless function of this unit.

• Select Yes to enable the wireless function of this unit.

iPod Interlock (iPod interlock)

Select whether or not to use the iPod/iPhone interlock

function. When the iPod/iPhone interlock function is on,

this unit automatically turns on if you turn on the iPod/

iPhone when this unit is in the standby mode. In addition,

this unit is set to the standby mode if the iPod/iPhone is set

to the standby mode.

Choices: OFF, ON*

• Select OFF to disable the iPod/iPhone interlock

function. The standby consumption power of this unit

decreases.

• Select ON to enable the iPod/iPhone interlock

function.

Group ID (Group ID)

The group ID is used for wirelessly connecting Yamaha

products that support AirWired. To establish a connection

among this unit, PDX-50TX and SWK-W10, set the group

ID of these products to the same group.

Choices: A1*, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3

• PDX-50TX supports “1” (A1), “2” (A2), and “3” (A3) only.

■ F.DISPLAY SETUP (Front panel display

setup)

SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → F.DISPLAY

SETUP

Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the

front panel display.

STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you operate this unit.

Choices: –2, –1, OFF*

AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you do not operate this unit. The front panel display

automatically dims or turns off according to this setting if

no operation is performed for a specified period of time.

Choices: DISPLAY OFF, –3 to –1, OFF*

• Select OFF for the same brightness as “STANDARD

DIMMER”.

• Select –3 to –1 to get dimmer (based on “STANDARD

DIMMER”).

• Select DISPLAY OFF to turn off the front panel

display.

DISPLAY MENU

CPower

GENTER

G /

IRETURN

ISETUP

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

37 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

Customizing this unit

(SET MENU)

System

configurations

(ADVANCED SETUP)

Using an external

amplifier

Controlling external

components

■ OSD SETUP (OSD setup)

SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → OSD SETUP

Use to adjust the display position and select the

background color of the OSD.

OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust

toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the

OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.

Choices: –5 to +5

Initial setting: ±0

OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color)

Use to select the background color of the OSD.

Choices: Blue*, Gray, Black, Purple, Red

■ LANGUAGE SETUP (Language setup)

SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → LANGUAGE

SETUP

Use to select the language used in the OSD.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),

ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),

Русский (Russian)

Initial setting: ENGLISH (English)

■ UNIT SETUP (Unit setup)

SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → UNIT SETUP

Use this to change the display unit of measurement.

Choices: METERS*, FEET

• Select METERS to enter distances in meters.

• Select FEET to enter distances in feet.

Note

• If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may

change.

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to

adjust and customize the way this unit operates.

1 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the

standby mode.

2 While holding down INPUT on the front

panel, press CPower p key on the remote

control.

Keep holding down INPUT until “ADVANCED

SETUP” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press ISETUP.

4 Press G / to select the desired menu

and then press GENTER.

• To return to the previous screen, press IRETURN.

5 Press G / to select the desired

parameter.

6 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the

standby mode.

The new setting will be reflected when you turn on

this unit next time.

• The initial settings are marked with “*”.

TURN ON VOLUME (Volume level at power-on)

Set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is

turned on.

Control range: OFF*, 01 to 99, MAX (Maximum)

MAX VOLUME SET (Maximum volume setting)

Set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not

output sound beyond the limited volume level.

Control range: 01 to 99, MAX* (Maximum)

PANEL INP.KEY (Front panel input key)

Select whether or not to enable the INPUT key on front

panel key. To disable the operations, select “P.INPUT:

OFF”.

Choices: P.INPUT: ON*, P.INPUT: OFF

F.PANEL KEY (Front panel key)

Select whether or not to enable front panel key operations

(except ADVANCED SETUP operations). To disable the

operations, select “F.PANEL: OFF”.

Choices: F.PANEL: ON*, F.PANEL: OFF

System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP)

INPUT VOLU ME INTELLIBEAM MIC

INPUT

VOL

DEMOX MODE

Example (when “DEMO MODE” is selected)

38 En

R.INPUT POWER (Power-on by remote control

input keys)

Select whether or not to automatically turn on this unit

when you select an input source on the remote control. To

enable the function, select “R.INPUT PW: ON”.

Choices: R.INPUT PW: OFF*, R.INPUT PW: ON

AC ON STANDBY (Standby after AC on)

Set this unit to the standby mode when the AC power is

recovered after the power to this unit was lost temporally

(disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet, power

outage, etc.). To enable the function, select “AC

STANDBY: ON”.

Choices: AC STANDBY: OFF*, AC STANDBY: ON

MEMORY PROTECT (Memory protect)

Protect the settings you have saved in the system memory.

To protect the settings, select “PROTECT: ON”.

Choices: PROTECT: OFF*, PROTECT: ON

DEMO MODE (Demo mode)

Test the sound beam output from this unit to experience

the sound beam. To set this unit to the demo mode, select

“BEAM DEMO: ON”.

Choices: BEAM DEMO: OFF*, BEAM DEMO: ON

• To move the beam horizontally, turn off this unit and

then turn on it again (“DEMO” appears on the front

panel display). Playback an input source and then press

EOFF.

• To stop the beam movement, press EOFF again.

• To adjust the beam angle manually, press

FSURROUND or FSTEREO when the beam is not

moving.

• After you checked the sound beam output, set this setting to

“BEAM DEMO: OFF”.

• If you set “SOUND OUT” to “PRE OUT”, “DEMO MODE”

does not function.

FACTORY PRESET (Factory preset)

Reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory

presets.

Choices: CANCEL*, RESET

You can connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Set “SOUND OUT” (page 34) to “PRE OUT” and then

configure “PRE OUT BASS Management” parameters.

See also: “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23)

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Output front right and left channel signals.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Output surround right and left channel signals.

3 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks

Output surround back right and left channel signals.

4 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Outputs center channel signals.

5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

Note

• The following functions are disabled when an external amplifier

is used.

– AUTO SETUP (page 15)

– CINEMA DSP programs (page 22)

– UniVolume (page 28)

– MUSIC ENHANCER (page 34)

– BASS EXTENSION (page 34)

– Adaptive DRC (page 34)

Using an external amplifier

FRONT

PRE OUT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

1234

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

HDMI 4 iPod FM

ENTER

SURROUND STEREO

OFF

ENTER

TAINMENT

MUSIC

CINEMA DSP

MOVIE

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TV AV

MENUTOP MENU

OPTION

MUTE

CODE SET

UNIVOLUME SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM

INPUT MUTE

TV VOL CH VOLUME

SETUP RETURN

MEMORY

SLEEPINFO

TUNING PRESET

TV AV

HDMI 4 iPod

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

TV AUX 1 AUX 2

OPTION SETUP RETURN

ENTER

MENUTOP MENU

MUTE INPUT

0 +10

ENT

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

MEMORY

ATransmission

indicator

BAV

BTV

DInput selector keys

EOFF

FSTEREO

FSURROUND

GCursor ( / / /

) keys

GENTER

HMENU

HTOP MENU

IRETURN

ISETUP

JCH /

LTV operation keys

NNumeric keys

OCODE SET

PExternal component

operation keys

39 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

Customizing this unit

(SET MENU)

System

configurations

(ADVANCED SETUP)

Using an external

amplifier

Controlling external

components

Note

Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if

a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.

You can control external components using the following

keys on the remote control of this unit by setting the

appropriate remote control codes (page 45). Before

operating the control keys, press one of the DInput

selector keys to select an external component to be

controlled.

B TV p

Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby

mode.

B AV p

Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to

the standby mode.

G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER

Use to select menu items.

H TOP MENU

Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD.

H MENU

Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD.

I RETURN

Returns to the previous menu screen.

J CH /

Switches between available channels for your external

component.

L TV operation keys

TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.

TV MUTE

Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.

TV INPUT

Switched the input source for your TV.

N Numeric keys

Use to enter numeric digits or specify a channel number.

O CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component

operations (page 39).

P External component operation keys

Use to control playback of your external component.

•The BTVp and LTV operation keys always work regardless

of the selected input source.

Notes

• Depending on external components, some or all operations may

not work. In this case, operate the component using the supplied

remote control.

• If you operate your TV with the remote control of this unit

when the HDMI control function is activated, this unit or

external component connected to this unit with HDMI works

improperly in some cases.

■ Setting remote control codes

1 While holding down OCODE SET, press

DInput selector key to which the remote

control code is assigned.

ATransmission indicator flashes twice.

2 Release OCODE SET.

3 Press NNumeric keys to enter the remote

control code (page 45) for your external

component.

Each time you press you press the key,

ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the 5-

digit remote control code is entered properly,

ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately

2 seconds.

• To clear remote control code set to a selected input source,

enter “00010”.

Note

• If any key other than NNumeric keys is pressed,

ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting

mode is canceled.

4 Perform a test operation using the remote

control of this unit.

If the external component functions correctly, the

remote control code setup is successful. If it does not

function correctly, the remote control code may be

incorrect. Check the remote control code for your

external component (page 45) and try again.

Note

• If no operation is performed after step 1 or in the middle of

step 2 within 30 seconds, ATransmission indicator

flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled.

■ Resetting all remote control codes

1 While holding down OCODE SET, press

ISETUP.

ATransmission indicator flashes twice.

2 Release OCODE SET.

3 Press NNumeric keys to enter “99999”.

Each time you press the NNumeric keys,

ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the

remote control code is entered properly,

ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately

2 seconds and then the initialization is completed.

Note

• If one of the other keys is pressed, ATransmission

indicator flashes 5 times and the initialization is canceled.

Controlling external components

40 En

APPENDIX

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction

below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer

or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit does not operate

properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an

external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive

static electricity) or by a power supply with low

voltage.

Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the

outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

This unit fails to turn on when

CPower (p) key is pressed, or

enters the standby mode soon

after the power has been turned

on.

The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to

the AC wall outlet.

Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC

wall outlet.

This unit has been exposed to a strong external

electric shock (such as lightning and strong static

electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC

power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds,

and use it normally.

This unit suddenly enters the

standby mode.

The internal temperature becomes too high and the

overheat protection circuitry has been activated.

Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and

turn it back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. 21

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or

DInput selector keys.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 21

The sound is muted. Press KMUTE or KVOLUME +/– to resume audio

output and adjust the volume level.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM

signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling

frequency) are being received from the source

component.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

Change the system settings of the source component. —

The HDMI components connected to this unit do not

support the HDCP copy protection standards.

Connect the HDMI components that support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and HDMI

audio signals are not being played back on this unit.

Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to this unit in “SET

MENU”.

No sound or too small sound from

a specific channel

The output level of the channel is muted. Raise the output level of the channel.

The beam setting is inappropriate. Adjust the beam setting.

You play back the source in the stereo mode. Start surround playback. 22

Some audio output methods do not output sound

beams for certain channels.

Select another beam mode.

No sound from the subwoofer. “BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT OR AUTO” in

“SUBWOOFER SET”.

Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in

“SUBWOOFER SET”.

The source does not contain low bass signals.

No sound from the subwoofer

connected by wireless.

The group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 are not set

to the same value.

Check whether the group IDs of this unit and SWK-

W10 are set to the same value.

“Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”.

Distorted or too little bass sound. “CROSS OVER” is set incorrectly in

“SUBWOOFER SET”.

Set “CROSS OVER” correctly in “SUBWOOFER

SET”.

Surround sound effects are

insubstantial.

The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped

room.

—

There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path

of the sound beam.

—

41 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

■ FM tuner

■ Remote control

Digital audio signals cannot be

played back. (q DIGITAL indicator

does not light up in the front panel

display.)

The playback component is connected to this unit

with an analog connection.

Connect them with an HDMI connection or a digital

connection.

The external component is not set to output digital

audio signals.

Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your

component and check the setting.

—

Bit streaming is disabled on the external component. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your

component and check the setting.

—

There is noise interference when a

subwoofer is not connected to this

unit.

The protection circuitry was in operation because a

source with strong bass elements was played back.

Turn down the volume level.

Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in

“SUBWOOFER SET”.

Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for

“SUBWOOFER SET”.

On-screen display does not

appear.

The cable is not connected to the TV or this unit

properly.

Connect the cable properly.

The HDMI control function does

not work properly.

“HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF” in “SET

MENU”.

Set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” in “SET MENU”.

The HDMI control function is disabled on your TV. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your TV

and check the setting.

—

The number of the connected HDMI components is

over the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components.

—

The automatic lipsync is not

effective even “AUTO LIP SYNC” is

set to “ON”.

The TV does not support the automatic lipsync. Set “AUTO LIP SYNC” to “OFF” and then manually

adjust the audio output delay.

“Not Available” appears on the

front panel display after key

operation.

The key is unable to function in the current condition. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may

cause this problem when the transmitter is too far

away or the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and clear

reception cannot be obtained even

with a good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path

interference.

—

The desired station cannot be

tuned into with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset stations can no

longer be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control does not work

and/or function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of

fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control

sensor of this unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

42 En

■ iPod

Cannot operate external

components with the remote

control of this unit.

The external component you want to operate is not

selected as the input source.

Press the desired DInput selector key to select the

external component you want to operate.

The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another

code for the same manufacturer using the “List of

remote control codes”.

Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there

are some models that do not respond to the remote

control.

Use the remote control supplied with the external

component.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound. PDX-50TX is connected to another device. Select the same group ID as selected on this unit.

—

PDX-50TX and this unit are not connected since they

are set to different groups.

Set both PDX-50TX and this unit to the same group.

“Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”.

Distance is too far. Move PDX-50TX closer to this unit.

—

There is a device (microwave oven, wireless LAN,

etc.) outputting signals in 2.4 GHz frequency band

nearby.

Move this unit away from the device. If the device is

IEEE802.11n-compliant, change the channel setting

of the device so as not to affect the unit.

—

The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX

firmly.

Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly.

—

The firmware of the iPod or iPhone is not updated. Download the latest iTunes software to update the

firmware of the iPod or iPhone.

—

The signal from PDX-50TX is blocked by your body

or metallic objects, etc.

Change the way of holding, orientation, or position of

PDX-50TX to avoid the object blocking the signal.

—

The battery of iPod or iPhone is low. Charge the iPod or iPhone.

—

The iPod or iPhone is in the process of connecting

with this unit.

Please wait for a while.

—

The protection circuitry has been activated by

excessive volume.

Turn down the volume.

Controlling volume on the iPod or

iPhone does not work.

The iPod or iPhone being used is not supported by

this unit.

Use an iPod or iPhone supported by this unit.

The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX

firmly.

Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly.

—

Suddenly this unit produces

sounds even though an iPod or

iPhone is not connected.

This unit is connected to another device. Change the group ID of this unit.

The iPod/iPhone interlock function

does not work.

“iPod Interlock” is set to “OFF”. Set “iPod Interlock” to “ON”.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

43 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels

(left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital

provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the

system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate

moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible

than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum

to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-

channel sources.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic

moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-

around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for

high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,

and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital

Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology

enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right

channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels

(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.

There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to

reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right

channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a

surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround

channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser

discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro

Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing

system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,

offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-

channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with

all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to

the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD

video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is

now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world.

DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-

free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2

surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back

channel to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal

playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music

sources and Cinema mode for movies.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including

Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96

kHz audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray

Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio

master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD

Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed

Glossary

44 En

for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing

an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV

receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television),

HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well

as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits

all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with

bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and

requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface

that meets the security requirements of content providers and system

operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■ LFE 0.1-channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The

frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range

compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in

Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression.

This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM

system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the

analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.

■ “x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors

that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is

particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

AMP SECTION

• Maximum Output Power

Woofer...........................................................20 W/ch (4 Ω, 100 Hz, 10% THD)

Small dia. speaker .............................................2 W/ch (4 Ω, 1 kHz, 10% THD)

SPEAKER SECTION

• Speaker type.................................................. 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic

•Driver

Small dia. speakers.............. 4 cm (1-1/2 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40

Woofers ....................................................................... 11 cm (4-1/2 in) cone × 2

Tweeters (YSP-5100 only) ................................2.5 cm (1 in) balanced dome x 2

• Frequency response

YSP-5100 ............................................... 70 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode)

YSP-4100 ............................................... 80 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode)

CONNECTIONS

• Input Jacks

TV, AUX 1 AUDIO IN............................................................... 2 pairs (Analog)

TV, AUX 1 DIGITAL IN

(FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz)

...............................................................................................2 (Optical digital)

AUX 2 DIGITAL IN

(FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz)

.............................................................................................. 1 (Coaxial digital)

AUX 1 VIDEO IN......................................................................... 1 (Composite)

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC

[Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL

AUX 2 VIDEO IN........................................................................ 1 (Component)

HDMI IN............................................................................................................ 4

• Output Jacks

SUBWOOFER .................................................................................................. 1

VIDEO OUT (composite input or menu screen) ......................... 1 (Composite)

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC

[Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL

HDMI OUT ....................................................................................................... 1

• System Connector Jack

INTELLIBEAM MIC ....................................................... 1 (Microphone input)

RS-232C .................................................................................1 (System control)

SYSTEM CONNECTOR .............................. 1 (for subwoofer power interlock)

IR IN ......................................................................................1 (System control)

IR-OUT ..................................................................................1 (System control)

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] .................................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

Wireless

• Frequency ...................................................................................................2.4 GHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ....................................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Europe and Russia models] ...................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Korea model] ............................................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[General model] ......................................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz

[China and Asia models] ............................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 55 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control OFF/Wireless Power OFF ......................................0.5 W or less

HDMI Control ON/AirWired ON (factory preset).......................... 1.0 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

YSP-5100

Maximum dimension.............1200 x 212 x 90 mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in)

With stands ........................1200 x 214 x 110.7mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in)

YSP-4100

Maximum dimension.............1030 x 212 x 90 mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in)

With stands ........................1030 x 214 x 110.7mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in)

• Weight

YSP-5100 .................................................................................11.0 kg (24.2 lbs)

YSP-4100 .................................................................................10.0 kg (22.0 lbs)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard:

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by

Digital Content Protection, LLC.

45 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION

ACCENT 14801, 16201

ACCUPHASE 16201

ACTION 14701, 14801, 15401

ACURA 00101

ADDISON 01201, 01601, 08401

ADMIRAL 01301, 02201, 05801,

14701, 14801, 15001,

15201, 18601

ADVENT 09601

ADYSON 14701, 15401

AEA 15701, 16201

AGB 06801

AIKO 01201, 14801, 15701,

16201

AIM 15701, 16201

AIWA 16901, 17101, 17701,

18301

AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901,

04601, 06801, 08901,

10501, 14701, 14801,

15401, 15701, 16201,

16701

AKIBA 15701, 16201

AKITO 15701, 16201

AKURA 03701, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16201

ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801,

08501, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16201

ALFA 14701

ALLSTAR 14701, 15701, 16201

AMERICA ACTION

02701

AMPRO 09401

AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501,

04801, 05101, 05301,

06801, 14801, 15001,

15701, 16201

ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401,

15701, 16201

ANAM NATIONAL

03401, 08301, 15701,

16201

ANGLO 14801

ANITECH 00101, 14701, 14801,

15401, 15701, 16201

ANSONIC 14801, 15701, 15901,

16201

AOC 00101, 00301, 00901,

01201, 01301, 01601,

02601, 02701, 05601,

14701, 15401, 16301,

16501, 17901

APEX DIGITAL

09301, 09701, 09901

AR SYSTEM 15701, 16201

ARC EN CIEL 16001

ARCAM 16001

ARDEM 15701, 16201

ARISTONA 14701, 15701, 16201

ART TECH 14701

ASA 01401

ASBERG 14701, 15701, 16201

ASORA 14801

ASTRA 14801, 15701, 16201

ATLANTIC 14701, 15701, 16201

ATORI 14801

ATORO 14801

AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701, 14701,

14801, 15701, 15901,

16201

AUDIOTON 14801

AUDIOVOX 14701

AUTOVOX 15501, 16101

AWA 00101, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

BAIRD 15801

BANG & OLUFSEN

07201

BASIC 00101

BASIC LINE 14701, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701,

14701, 14801, 15701,

16101, 16201

BAYSONIC 02701

BEAUMARK 02601

BEC 14701

BECRESE 14701, 15401

BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001,

09101, 14701, 15701,

16201

BELCOR 16301

BELL & HOWELL

02001, 14701, 18401,

18601, 18701

BENCHMARK-BEAUMARK

14701, 14801, 15401

BEON 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

BESTAR 14701, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

BESTAR-DAEWOO

15901

BIGSTON 14801

BLACK DIAMOND

16201

BLAUPUNKT 02801

BLUE SKY 08501, 11401, 14701,

15701, 16201

BONDSTEC 03301, 15501

BPL 15701, 16201

BRADFORD 02701

BRANDT 01701, 04201, 15801,

16001

BRENDSTAR 14801

BRINKMANN 15701, 16201

BRIONVEGA 14701, 15001, 15701,

16201

BRIORRYEGA 14701

BROCKWOOD 15401

BROKSONIC 03101, 05801, 15401,

16801

BROKWOOD 16301

BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401,

04801, 04901, 08501,

11401, 14701, 15701,

15901, 16101, 16201

BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501,

14601

CAMPLE 15401

CANDLE 00301, 15401, 16301,

17801, 17901

CAPEHART 14701, 15401

CARAD 15701, 16201

CARENA 15701, 16201

CARNIVALE 00301

CARREFOUR 14701, 15701, 16201

CARVER 00801, 02401, 14701

CASCADE 00101, 15701, 16201

CASIO 15701, 16101, 16201

CATHAY 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

CCE 00401, 15701, 16201

CELEBRITY 00001

CELERA 09701

CENTURION 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201, 17901

CGE 03301, 14801, 16001

CGM 14801

CHANGHONG 09701

CHING TAI 00101, 01201

CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201,

02701

CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701

CIE 14801

CIMLINE 00101, 14801

CINERAL 01201, 05601

CIRCUIT CITY15401

CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201,

14701, 15401, 16301,

16701, 16801, 17801,

17901, 18101, 18201,

18601

CITY 14801

CLARION 02701

CLARIVOX 00401, 15701, 16201

CLATRONIC 03301, 04701, 14801,

15701, 16201

CLP CLASSIC 16301

COLORTYME 14701, 16301, 17901

COMPUTRON 14801

CONCERTO 16301, 17901

CONCORDE 14801

CONDOR 04101, 04701, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

CONIC 14701, 15401

CONRAC 10301

CONRAD 15701, 16201

CONTEC 00101, 02701, 14801,

15701, 16201, 18901

CONTINENTAL EDISON

16001

CORONADO 15401

COSMEL 14801, 15701, 16201

CRAIG 02701, 14701

CROSLEY 00801, 14701

CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701,

04701, 05201, 14701,

14801, 15401, 15701,

16201

CRYSTAL 14701

CTC 03301

CURTIS MATHES

00301, 00501, 00801,

00901, 01301, 01801,

02001, 02301, 05601,

08901, 11801, 12201,

14701, 15401, 16301,

16601, 16701, 17901,

18101, 18401, 18601,

18701

CXC 02701

DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401,

01201, 01601, 02001,

02401, 02601, 02701,

04901, 05601, 07901,

08201, 13101, 14701,

14801, 15401, 15701,

15901, 16201, 16301,

16501, 17901

DAICHI 14801

DANSAI 00401, 15401, 15701,

16201

DAWA 14701, 15701, 16201

DAYTON 00101

DAYTRON 14801, 15401, 15701,

15901, 16201, 16301,

17901

DE GRAAF 02901, 06901

DECCA 00401, 06801, 14701,

15701, 16201

DEITRON 15701, 15901, 16201

DENON 01801

DENVER 14801, 15701, 16201

DESMET 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

DIAMANT 15701, 16201

DIAMOND 14801

DIGATRON 00401

DIGILINE 15701, 16201

DIGISTAR 17001, 17501

DIGITOR 15701, 16201

DIK 15701, 16201

DIMENSIA 18401, 18701

DIXI 00101, 00401, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

DORIC 16101

DTS 14801

DUAL 14701, 14801, 15001,

15301, 15601, 15701,

15801, 16001, 16101,

16201

DUMONT 00201, 15401, 16301

DURABRAND 16801, 17601, 18201

DUX 15701, 16201

D-VISION 15701, 16201

DWIN 09201, 10101

DYNAMIC 14801

DYNATECH 15401

DYNATRON 15701, 16201

DYNEX 15701

ECE 00401

ELBE 03501, 15001, 15701,

16201

ELBIT 14701

ELECS 14701

ELECTRATUNE

15401

ELECTRO TECH

14801

ELECTROBAND

00001

ELECTROHOME

15401, 16301, 17901,

19001

ELECTRONIKA

14701

ELEKTA 14801, 15701, 16201

ELEKTRA 18601

ELEKTRONIKA

14701

ELG 15701, 16201

ELIN 00401, 06901, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16101,

16201

ELITE 04101, 14701, 15401,

15701, 16201

ELTA 00101, 14801, 14901

EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701,

03101, 04601, 05801,

07901, 15401, 15701,

16201, 16301, 16801,

17201, 17701, 17901,

18201, 18501, 19301

ENVISION 00301, 10601, 16301,

17901

EPSON 11001

ERRES 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

ESC 15701, 16201

ETHER 00101, 00301

ETRON 00101, 14801, 15701,

16201

EUROMAN 15701, 16201

EUROMANN 14701

EUROPA 15701, 16201

EUROPHON 06801, 14701, 15701,

16201

EXCEL 15701, 16201

EXQUISIT 15701, 16201

FAMILY LIFE 15701, 16201

FENNER 14801, 15901

FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701,

03201, 03801, 04201,

07101, 15701, 15801,

16201

FIDELIS 14801

FIDELITY 04601, 15701, 16201

FILSAI 14801

FINLANDIA 02901, 04401, 15801

FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501,

04401, 06801, 14701,

14801, 15101, 15701,

16201

FIRST LINE 14701, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16101, 16201

FIRSTAR 00101, 03101

FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501

FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901,

04701, 16101, 18901

FLINT 05701, 14701, 15701,

16201

FORMENTI 00401, 04101, 14701,

15701, 16201

List of remote control codes

46 En

FORTRESS 01301, 15401

FRABA 15701, 16201

FRIAC 15701, 16201

FRONTECH 02201, 03301, 03701,

14801, 16101

FUJITSU 08701, 10401, 15401,

15701, 16201

FUJITSU GENERAL

15001

FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701,

14801, 15401, 17201,

17701, 18201

FUTURE 15701, 16201

FUTURETECH

02701

GALAXI 15701, 16201

GALAXIS 15701, 16201

GALERIA 14801

GATEWAY 13301, 13401

GBC 14801, 15901

GE 00301, 00501, 00601,

01201, 02601, 02701,

05601, 07101, 11801,

12201, 12601, 15801,

16301, 16401, 16601,

17301, 17401, 17901,

18401, 18701, 19001,

19101

GEC 00401, 06801, 15701,

16101, 16201

GELOSO 00101, 14801, 15901

GEMSOUND 14801

GENERAL 14801

GENERAL ELECTRIC

15801

GENERAL TECHNIC

14801

GENEXXA 02201, 14701, 15701,

16201

GIBRALTER 00201, 00301, 16301

GITEM 14701

GM 14801

GMG 14801

GOLDHAND 14801

GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701,

02001, 02601, 05001,

14701, 14801, 15201,

15401, 15501, 15701,

16201, 16301, 16501,

17701, 17901, 18901

GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901,

08201, 14701, 14801,

15701, 15801, 15901,

16201

GOREMJE 04701

GPM 14801

GRADIENTE 00701, 02401, 15701,

16201

GRADIN 14701, 14801

GRAETZ 02201, 04601, 15701,

16201

GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301,

06801, 14701, 15701,

15801, 16201

GRANDIN 07701, 15701, 15901,

16201

GRENADIER 14801

GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301,

07001, 07401, 15701,

16201

GRUNPY 02701

GTT 14801

HAIER 17601, 18801

HALLMARK 02601, 15401, 16301,

17901

HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701

HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601,

05201, 07001, 14701,

14801, 15301, 15701,

16101, 16201

HANTAREX 06801, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16201

HANTOR 15701, 16201

HARLEY DAVIDSON

15401

HARMAN/KARDON

00801

HARRAD 15401

HARVARD 02701, 15401

HARWOOD 15701, 16201

HAUPPAUGE 15701, 16201

HAVERMY 01301

HCM 00101, 05101, 14801,

15701, 16201

HEATHKIT 14701

HEDZON 15701, 16201

HELLO KITTY 05601

HEMMERMANN

16101

HIFIVOX 16001

HIGHLINE 15701, 16201

HILINE 14801

HINARI 00101, 00401, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

HISAWA 05701

HISENSE 19201

HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201,

01501, 01701, 01801,

02201, 02601, 03001,

04501, 06101, 06901,

07301, 11701, 12101,

14701, 15401, 15701,

15801, 16101, 16201,

16301, 17701, 17901,

18601, 18901

HORIZONT 14701

HORNYPHON 14701

HORNYPHONE

15701, 16201

HUA TUN 00101

HUANYU 04901, 15901

HYPER 14801, 15501

HYPSON 00401, 03701, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

IBERIA 15701, 16201

ICE 03701, 04801, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

ICT 15701, 16201

IMA 15401

IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201,

14701, 15701, 16101,

16201

INDIANA 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

INFINITY 00801, 14701

INGELEN 02201

INGERSOLL 14801

INNO HIT 06801, 14701, 14801,

15201, 15701, 16201

INNOHIT 14701, 14801, 15201

INNOVA 00401

INNOVATION 15701, 16201

INSIGNIA 16801, 17001, 17201,

17501, 17601, 18001,

18201, 19401, 19501

INTEQ 00201

INTERACTIVE

15701, 16201

INTERBUY 14801, 15701, 16201

INTERDISCOUNT

14701

INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301,

04601, 06701, 14701,

15701, 16101, 16201

INTERNAL 15701, 15901, 16201

INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001,

14901, 15701, 16201

IRRADIO 14701, 14801, 15101,

15201, 15501, 15701,

16201

IST 14701

ISUKAI 14701, 15701, 16201

ITL 14801

ITS 04801, 14801, 15701,

16201

ITT 02201, 04601, 06901,

16101

ITT NOKIA 16101

ITV 15701, 15901, 16201

JBL 00801, 14701

JC PENNEY 16301, 16401, 16501,

16601, 16701, 17301,

17401, 17801, 17901,

18101, 18401, 18501,

18701, 18901, 19001,

19101,

JCB 00001

JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201,

02101, 03101

JENSEN 09601, 16301, 17901,

19501

JETPOINT 14701

JINLIPU 14801

JMB 15701, 15901, 16201

JULIBEE 16201

JUMBOTRONIC

14701

JVC 00701, 04801, 05801,

08401, 08701, 14701,

18901

KAISER 14701

KAISUI 00101, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16201

KAPSCH 02201

KARCHER 07701, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16201

KATHREIN 07001, 15701, 16201

KAWASHO 16301, 17901

KEC 02701

KENDO 00401, 14701, 14801,

15001, 15701, 16201

KENNEDY 15001

KENWOOD 00301, 15401, 16301,

17901

KIOTA 14801

KITION 16201

KITON 15701

KLH 15401

KNEISSEL 03501, 05401, 15301,

15701, 15901, 16201

KOBIC 14801

KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701

KOLSTER 14701, 15701, 16101,

16201

KONICHI 14801

KONKA 15701, 16201, 18001,

19401

KORPEL 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

KOSMOS 15701, 16201

KOYODA 00101

KTV 00301, 02701, 15401

KUASHO 14701, 15401

KUBA 16101

KUBA ELECTRONIC

16101

KURAZAI 18601

L&S ELECTRONIC

10301

LEADER 14801

LECSON 15701, 16201

LEGEND 14801

LENCO 14701, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

LENOIR 14801

LEVIS AUSTRIA

15701, 16201

LEYCO 00401, 03701, 14701,

15701, 16201

LG 00301, 00401, 00901,

01601, 02601, 09001,

15701, 16201, 16301,

16501, 17701, 17901,

18901

LIESENK & TTER

00401, 15701, 16201

LIESENK?TTER

14701

LIESENKOTTER

14701, 15701, 16201

LIFE 14801

LIFETEC 14801, 15701, 15901,

16201

LINITRON 15401

LLOYD 15401

LLOYD’S 14801

LODGENET 18401, 18601, 18701

LOEWE 06701, 14701, 15701,

16201

LOGIK 15701, 16201, 18401,

18601, 18701

LUMA 14701, 14801, 15001,

15701, 15901, 16201

LUMATRON 15701, 16201

LUX MAY 14701, 15701, 16201

LUXMAN 16301, 17901

LUXOR 04501, 04601, 15201,

16101

LXI 00501, 00801, 02001,

02101, 02601, 14701,

16301, 16601, 17401,

17701, 17901, 18101,

18401, 18701

M ELECTRONIC00101, 00401, 01401,

01501, 01701, 02201,

03801, 04401, 04901,

06001, 14801

M ELECTRONICS14701, 14801

MACYS 15401

MADISON 15701, 16201

MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801, 14701,

14801

MAGNAFON 06801

MAGNASONIC14701, 14801, 15401

MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001,

12601, 14701, 15701,

16201, 16301, 17201,

17801, 17901

MAGNUM 15701, 16201

MAJESTIC 18401, 18601, 18701

MANESTH 03701, 04101, 14701,

15701, 16201

MANHATTAN 15701, 16201

MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801,

07001, 14701, 15701,

16201, 16301, 17901

MARK 00401, 14701, 15701,

15901, 16201

MASUDA 15701, 16201

MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901,

04801, 06301, 06801,

14701, 14801, 15701,

16101, 16201

MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301

MAVA 15401

MAXAM 14801

MAXELL 14801

MCE 14801

MEDIATOR 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401,

15701, 16201

MEGATRON 01801, 02601, 16301,

17901

MELECTRONIC15701, 15801, 15901,

16101, 16201

MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001,

02601, 03401, 05801,

11401, 14801, 16301,

16801, 17901, 18401,

18601, 18701

MEMPHIS 14801

MERCURY 14801, 15701, 16201

METZ 05501, 15701, 16201

MGA 00301, 01901, 02601,

15701, 16201, 16301,

16501, 17901, 18901,

19001

MICROMAXX 10301, 15701, 16201

MICROSTAR 10301

MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601,

15401, 16401, 16601,

17401, 18701

MINATO 15701, 16201

MINERVA 06301

MINOKA 05101, 14701, 15701,

16201

MINUTZ 19101

MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601,

01901, 02001, 02601,

02701, 03101, 03401,

06701, 11201, 11901,

14701, 14801, 15701,

16201, 16301

16501, 17901, 19001

MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801,

07601, 15201, 15301

MONTGOMERY WARD18401, 18601,

47 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION

18701

MORGAN’S 15701, 16201

MOTOROLA 01301, 14701

MTC 00301, 00901, 06701,

15401, 16101, 16301,

16501, 16701, 17901,

18101

MULTITEC 15701, 16201

MULTITECH 00101, 02701, 14701,

14801, 15401, 15701,

16101, 16201

MUSIKLAND 15701, 16201

MYRYAD 07001, 15701, 16201

NAD 02101, 02601, 04601,

11301, 16301, 17901,

18101

NAIKO 15701, 16201

NAKIMURA 15701, 15901, 16201

NAMSUNC 14801

NATIONAL 14701

NEC 00101, 00301, 00601,

02001, 02101, 02401,

02601, 05701, 06501,

13201, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201, 16301,

16501, 17901

NECKERMANN00401, 07001, 14701,

14801, 15001, 15701,

16101, 16201

NEI 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

NETSAT 00401, 15701, 16201

NEUFUNK 15701, 16201

NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301,

02601

NEWTECH 14701, 14801, 15701,

15801, 16201

NEXXTECH 17501

NIKKAI 00401, 03701, 14701,

15401, 15701, 16201

NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601,

16301, 17901

NOBLEX 14801

NOBLIKO 15101

NOGAMATIC 16001

NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001,

06901, 08101, 14801,

15901, 16101

NONAME 14701

NORCENT 09301, 10801

NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101,

15701, 15801, 16001,

16201

NORMEREL 15701, 16201

NOVABEAM 14701

NOVATRONIC 14701, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

NTC 01201

O GENERAL 14801

OCEANIC 02201, 04601

OKANO 14801, 15701, 16201

OLEVIA 19701, 19801, 19901,

20001

OLYMPIC 14801

ONCEAS 14801

ONWA 02701, 05301

OPERA 14701, 15701, 16201

OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401,

08301

OPTONICA 01301

ORBIT 14701, 15701, 16201

ORIENT 14801

ORION 00401, 03101, 04101,

05801, 06801, 14701,

14801, 15401, 15701,

16201, 16801

ORLINE 15701, 16201

ORMOND 15701, 16201

OSAKI 03701, 05101, 15701,

15901, 16201

OSIO 15701, 16201

OSUME 15701, 16201

OTF 14801

OTTO VERSAND00401, 04101, 06701,

07001, 14701, 14801,

14901, 15501, 15601,

15701, 15801, 16101,

16201

OTTO-VERSAND14701, 14801, 14901

PACIFIC 15701, 16201

PAEL 15101

PALLADIUM 04701, 05201, 14701,

15701, 16101, 16201

PALSONIC 15701, 16201

PANAMA 03701, 14801, 15701,

16201

PANASHIBA 14801

PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801,

02201, 03401, 08301,

12401, 14701, 15701,

16201, 16401

PANAVISION 15701, 16201

PANAVOX 14801

PANORAMA 14801

PATHE CINEMA03201, 04101, 15301,

16101

PATHE MARCONI16001

PAUSA 00101, 14801

PCE/PEC 15401

PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601,

00901, 02101, 02601,

12201, 15401

PERDIO 04101, 15701, 16201

PERFEKT 14701, 15701, 16201

PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801,

01801, 02601, 02701,

03301, 05801, 13101,

14701, 14801, 15701,

16201, 16301, 16501,

17801, 17901

PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401,

00601, 00801, 01201,

01601, 02601, 04901,

07001, 08801, 12601,

15701, 15801, 15901,

16201, 16301

17201, 17301, 17801,

18201

PHILIPS (F) 14701

PHOENIX 14701, 15701, 16201

PHONOLA 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

PILOT 00301, 15701, 16201,

16301

PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301,

03801, 08601, 09501,

11301, 14701, 15701,

15801, 16201, 16301,

17901

PLANTRON 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

POLAROID 19201, 19501, 19601

POPPY 14801

PORTLAND 01201, 15401, 15901,

16301, 16501, 17901

PRANDONI PRINCE15101

PRANDONI-PRINCE06801

PRICE CLUB 16701

PRIMA 09601, 14801, 15401,

17001, 17501

PRINCESS 14801

PRINZ 16101

PRISM 00601, 16401

PROELCO 14701

PROFEX 00101, 04601, 14801,

14901

PROFITRONIC 14701, 15701, 16201

PROLINE 15701, 16201

PROSCAN 00501, 16601, 17401,

18401, 18701

PROSONIC 15701, 15901, 16201

PROTEC 14701, 14801

PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301,

03701, 05201, 08501,

15701, 16101

PROTECT 16201

PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601,

14801, 15401, 16301,

17901, 18901

PROVISION 15701, 16201

PULSAR 00201, 16301

PULSER 14701, 14801, 15401

PYE 14701, 15701, 15901,

16101, 16201

PYMI 14801

QUASAR 00601, 03401, 08301,

16401

QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601,

06701, 14701, 14801,

15001, 15101, 15201,

15401, 15501, 15701,

16101, 16201

R LINE 14701, 15701, 16201

RADIALVA 15701, 16201

RADIO SHACK15401, 15701, 16201,

16301, 17701, 17901,

18401, 18701, 18901

RADIOLA 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

RADIOMARELLI06801, 15701, 16201

RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001,

02601, 02701

RADIOSTONE 16201

RADIOTONE 14701, 14801, 15701

RCA 00001, 00301, 00501,

01101, 01201, 02601,

08601, 11501, 11801,

13901, 12201, 12501,

12601, 12801, 15801,

16301, 16401

16501, 16601, 17401,

17901, 18401, 18701,

19001

REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601,

02701, 16301, 17701,

17901, 18401, 18701,

18901

RECOR 15701, 16201

RECORD 14701

RECTILIGNE 15701, 16201

REDIFFUSION 04601

REDSTAR 15701, 16201

REFLEX 15701, 16201

REGENTE 14801

REOC 09001

REVOX 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

REVOX/STUDER14701

REX 02201, 03501, 03701,

15001, 15301

RFT 05201, 15301, 15701,

16201

RICOH 15701, 16201

R-LINE 00401

RMB 15401

ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201,

14801, 15701, 16201

RODEX 15701, 16201

ROSITA 14801

ROWA 14801

ROYAL 14801

RUKOPIR 15701, 16201

RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501,

07501

SABA 01701, 02201, 03801,

04201, 15801, 16001

SACCS 03201

SAGEM 07701

SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801,

14701

SAIVOD 15701, 16201

SAKURA 14801

SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901,

15201, 16101

SAMBERS 06801, 15101, 15201

SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201,

01301, 02001, 02501,

02601, 08301, 13301,

15401, 16301, 17901,

18901

SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401,

00901, 01101, 01201,

02001, 02601, 03701,

04701, 07001, 07401,

07801, 08901, 09801,

10501, 10701

14701, 14801, 15201,

15401, 15701, 16201,

16301, 16501, 16601,

16701, 17901, 18101,

18901, 20301

SAMSUX 15401, 17901

SAMTRON 16701

SANKY 15401

SANSEI 05601

SANSUI 05801, 14701, 14801,

15401, 15701, 16201,

16801

SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701,

02901, 04301, 10201,

14801, 15301, 15701,

16201, 16301, 18901

SAVE 15701, 16201

SBR 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

SCEPTRE 20201

SCHAUB LORENZ

04601, 15901, 16101

SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801,

08501, 14701, 14801,

15001, 15301, 15501,

15601, 15701, 15801,

16101, 16201

SCOTCH 02601, 16301, 17901

SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101,

15401, 16301, 17901

SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001,

02101, 02501, 02601,

16301, 16601, 16701,

17201, 17401, 17901,

18101, 18201, 18401,

18701, 18901

SEG 03701, 08501, 14801,

15401, 15701, 16101,

16201

SEI 06801, 15701, 16101,

16201

SEI-SINUDYNE

14701, 15701, 16201

SELECO 02201, 03501, 15001,

15301

SEMIVOX 02701

SEMP 02101

SEMUA 15401

SENCORA 14801

SENTRA 16101

SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301,

15401, 16301, 17901

SHEN YING 00101, 01201

SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101

SHINTOSHI 15701, 16201

SHIVAKI 14701, 15701, 15901,

16201

SHOGUN 16301

SHOW 14801

SIAREM 06801

SIEMENS 00401, 02801, 14701,

15401, 15701, 16201

SIERA 15701, 16201

SIERRA 14701

SIGNATURE 18401, 18601, 18701,

19301

SILMA 14701

SILVA 14801, 15701, 16201

SILVER 15701, 16201

SIMPSON 17801

SINGER 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

SINUDYNE 06801, 14701, 15001,

15701, 16101, 16201

SKANTIC 04501

SKY 00401, 15701, 16201

SKYGIANT 02701

SKYWORTH 00401

SNYDER 14701

SOLAVOX 02201, 15701, 16201

SONIKO 15701, 16201

SONITRON 02901

SONNECLAIR 15701, 16201

SONOKO 00101, 00401, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

SONOLOR 02201, 02901

SONTEC 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

SONY 00001, 08301, 11101,

11601, 12701, 12901,

15701, 16201

SOUND & VISION

48 En

15701, 15901, 16201

SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701, 15401,

16301, 17801, 17901

SOUNDMASTER

14801

SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201, 15701,

16201

SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201,

02101, 02601

SPECTRICIAN 14701, 15401

SQUAREVIEW 02501, 18201

SSS 02701, 16301

STANDARD 00101, 14801, 15701,

15901, 16201

STARLITE 02701, 14801, 15701,

16201

STARLUX 14801

STERN 02201, 03501, 15001,

15301

STRATO 15701, 16201

SUNIC LINE 15701, 16201

SUNKAI 15701, 16201

SUNSTAR 14801, 15701, 16201

SUNWOOD 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

SUPERSCAN 17201

SUPERTEC 14801

SUPERTECH 14801, 15701, 16201

SUPRA 14801, 15901, 16301

SUPREMACY 15401

SUPREME 00001

SUTRON 14801

SYC LINE 14801

SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501,

14701, 16301, 16801,

17201, 17701, 17801,

17901, 18201

SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701, 15401,

17201, 17701, 18201

SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201,

01301, 02601, 05601

SYNTAX 19701

SYSLINE 00401, 15701, 16201

T + A 05501

TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601

TAI YI 00101

TANDBERG 15001

TANDY 01301, 02201

TASHIKO 01201, 08301

TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601,

00801, 00901, 02001,

02101, 06801, 14701,

15701, 16201, 18801

TCM 10301

TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701,

05101, 05201, 05701,

08501, 11401, 15701,

16101, 16201

TEAK 14801

TEC 03301, 14801, 15001,

15701, 16201

TECH LINE 15701, 16201

TECHNEMA 04101

TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301,

14701, 16401

TECHNILAND 14701

TECHNISAT 15701, 16201

TECHNOL 14801

TECHWOOD 00601, 16301, 16401,

17901

TECNISON 14801

TECO 00101, 00601, 01201,

01301, 02601, 03701,

08401

TEDELEX 14801, 15701, 16201

TEKNANT 14701, 14801

TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201,

01901, 02701, 15401,

16301, 16501, 16701,

17801, 17901, 18101,

18401, 18601, 18701,

18901,

TEKON 14801

TELEAVIA 15801, 16001

TELECOR 15701, 16201

TELEFAC 14801

TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201,

08001, 08901, 15701,

15801, 16001, 16201

TELEFUSION 15701, 16201

TELEGAZI 15701, 16201

TELEMEISTER

04101, 15701, 16201

TELEOPTA 14801

TELERENT 18401, 18601, 18701

TELESONIC 15701, 16201

TELESTAR 14801, 15701, 16201

TELETECH 00101, 14801, 15701,

16201

TELETON 16101

TELEVIEW 15701, 16201

TEMPEST 14801, 15701, 16201

TENNESSEE 15701, 16201

TENSAI 04101, 14701, 14801,

15701, 15901, 16201

TENSON 14801

TERA 00301, 16301

TESLA 14701

TESLA ORAVA14701

TEVION 15701, 16201

TEXET 15901

THOMAS 14701, 14801, 15401

THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101,

08001, 12501, 15701,

15801, 16001, 16101,

16201

THORN 00401, 01401, 04601,

06701, 14701, 15101,

15701, 15801, 15901,

16201

THORN-FERGUSON

14701, 15001

TMK 02601, 16301, 17901

TNCI 00201

TOBO 14801

TOKAI 14701, 15701, 15901,

16201

TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101,

06601, 07801, 08301,

10901, 12101, 12301,

13001, 13201, 16701,

18101, 18901

TOSONIC 15401

TOTEVISION 15401

TOWADA 16101

TRANS CONTINENS

15701, 16201

TRANSONIC 15701, 16201

TREVI 14801

TRIAD 14701, 15701, 16201

TRILUX 14701

TRIUMPH 06801, 15701, 16201

TRIVISION 14801

TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201

TVS 05801

TVTEXT 95 16201

UHER 04101, 14701, 15701,

15901, 16201

ULTRAVOX 15701, 15901, 16201

UMA 14701

UNIC LINE 15701, 16101, 16201

UNIMOR 14701

UNITED 15701, 16201

UNIVERSAL 17301, 19101

UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501,

03701, 04401, 04701,

06401, 14701, 14801,

15701, 16101, 16201

UNIVOX 15701, 16201

URANYA 14801

VANGUARD 14801

VECO 14801

VECTOR RESEARCH

00301

VESTEL 00401, 14701, 15701,

16201

VEXA 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301,

08401

VIDEO SYSTEM

14701, 15701, 16201

VIDEOSAT 03301

VIDEOTECHNIC

15901

VIDIKRON 00801

VIDION 14801

VIDTECH 02601, 16301, 16501,

17901

VIEWSONIC 13301

VISION 04101, 14801, 15701,

16201

VISON 14701

VIZIO 18801

VORTEC 14701, 15701, 16201

VOXSON 02201, 14701, 15701,

16201

WALTHAM 04501, 15701, 16201

WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601,

11301, 14701, 16301,

16501, 17301, 17801,

17901, 18401, 18601,

18701, 19101

WATSON 00401, 04101, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

WATT RADIO 16101

WAYCON 02101

WEGA 15701, 16201

WEGAVOX 14701, 14801, 15701,

16201

WELTBLICK 14701, 15701, 16201

WESTON 15701, 16201

WHARFEDALE

15701, 16201

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

00401, 04101, 05801,

07901, 14701, 15701,

16201, 17701

WINSTON 14701, 14801

WINTERNITZ 14801

WORLDVIEW 14701, 14801

XRYPTON 15701, 16201

YAMAHA 00301, 01801, 08301,

10001, 11001, 13501,

13601, 13701, 13801,

14001, 14101, 14201,

16301, 16501, 17901

YAMAJI 03609

YAMISHI 15701, 16201

YAPSHE 03401

YOKAN 15701, 16201

YOKO 00401, 03701, 14701,

14801, 15701, 16201

YORK 14701

ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601,

05801, 14701, 16301,

16801, 17701, 17901,

18601, 19301

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

02805, 05605

AIWA 05605, 05705, 07105

AKAI 07505

ALBA 02605

AMSTRAD 02305

APEX 07605, 08705

APEX DIGITAL

02105, 02605, 03005,

03505, 03605, 03705,

04105, 05805

AUDIOVOX 08805

AXION 08805

BBK 06105, 06205, 06305,

06405, 06505, 06605,

06705, 06805, 06905,

07005

BLAUPINKT 02605

BLAUPUNKT 08705

BLUE PARADE

01005

BLUE SKY 05805

BRANDT 06005

BUSH 02305, 05905

CENTREX 02105

CENTRIOS 08805

CINEVISION 07405

CLASSIC 05605

CLATRONIC 03405

COBY 07305, 07605, 07905,

08005, 08105, 08305,

08505

CONCEPT 08705

CONIA 05805

CROWN 06005

CURTIS INTERNATIONAL

08505

CYBERHOME 02405

CYTRON 06005

DAEWOO 03205, 03305

DANSAI 03205

DECCA 03205

DENON 00005

DIAMOND 03105, 06005

DIGITREX 02105, 07605

Digitrex 05805

DISNEY 08405

DUAL 05605, 06005

DURABRAND 07405

DVD2000 00205

ELTA 05905, 07205, 07505

EMERSON 01205, 07405, 07805,

08405, 08605

ENTERPRISE 01205

FERGUSON 06005

FISHER 02005

FUNAI 07805, 08405

GE 00305, 02605, 08705

GO VIDEO 02505

GOLDSTAR 02905, 07405

GOODMANS 05905, 06005

GRADIENTE 01805

GREENHILL 02605, 08705

GRUNDIG 00705, 06005

HARMAN KARDON

08205

HARMAN/KARDON

05505

HELIOS 09205

HITACHI 01105, 01905

HITEKER 02105, 05805, 07605

INITIAL 08705

INSIGNIA 07405, 07705, 07805,

08705, 08805

JBL 08205

JVC 00905, 01305

KENWOOD 00005, 00605

KLH 02605, 08705

KONKA 07705

KOSS 01805

KXD 07305

LENCO 06005

LENOXX 05905, 07505

LG 02905, 07405

LIFETEC 06005

LIMIT 03105

LIQUIDVIDEO 08805

MAGNAVOX 00105, 02205, 07805

MARANTZ 00705, 07405

MATSUI 06005

MBO 05905

MEDION 06005

MEMOREX 03805

MICO 02705

MICROSOFT 00305

MINTEK 02605, 08705

MITSUBISHI 00205

MUSTEK 02805, 05605

Mx ONDA 06005

NAD 07405

NESA 02605, 08705

NORCENT 08005, 08505

ONKYO 00105

OPPO 08905, 09005, 09105

ORITRON 01805, 06005

PALSONIC 02105, 05805

PANASONIC 00005, 01605, 04205

PHILIPS 00105, 00705, 01705,

03905, 07805, 08405

PIONEER 00405, 01005, 01505,

01605

POLK AUDIO 00705

PORTLAND 07505

PROLINE 06005

PROSCAN 00305

PROSONIC 08005

QWESTAR 01805

49 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION

RCA 00305, 01005, 02605,

08705

RIO 07405

ROADSTAR 05905

ROTEL 01305

SABA 06005

SAMSUNG 01105, 04505

SANYO 02005

SCHNEIDER 06005

SCOTT 05805, 06005

SEARS 07805

SHANGHAI 05805

SHARP 01405

SHERWOOD 03205

SHINCO 08705

SHINSONIC 00505, 08705

SINGER 05905

SKYMASTER 05605

SLIM ART 03305

SM ELECTRONIC

02805

SM ELECTRONICS

05605, 05905

SONY 00505, 04005

STANDARD 06005

SUPERSCAN 07805

SV2000 07805

SVA 05805

SYLVANIA 02205, 07805, 08405

SYMPHONIC 07805, 08405, 08605

TATUNG 03205

TEAC 01005, 02605

TECHNICS 00005

TENSAI 05905, 06005

TEVION 06005

THETA DIGITAL

01005

THOMSON 00305

TOSHIBA 00105, 04605

URBAN CONCEPTS

00105

VOXSON 05605

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

08405

XBOX 00305

YAMAHA 00005, 00705, 00805,

04305, 04405

YUKAI 05605

ZENITH 00105, 01205, 02905,

07405

ZEUS 03305

BD PLAYER

DENON 01307

LG 00907

LOEWE 00307

MARANTZ 00707

ONKYO 00207

PANASONIC 00807

PHILIPS 00607

PIONEER 01007, 01107

SAMSUMG 00507

SHARP 01207

SONY 00407

YAMAHA 00007, 00107

DVD RECORDER

PHILIPS 00806

VICTOR 01406

YAMAHA 00706

VCR

ADMIRAL 01102

ADVENTURA 00002

AIKO 02102

AIWA 00002, 00402, 02202,

02602, 02702

AKAI 00602, 02302, 04902,

05902, 06602

AKIBA 01402

ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302,

02702

AMERICA ACTION

02102

AMERICAN HIGH

00302, 06402

AMSTRAD 00002, 04702

ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002,

02102, 02902

ANAM NATIONAL

01902, 04502

ANITECH 01402

ASA 00402, 01502

ASHA 02002, 05502

ASUKA 00402

AUDIO DYNAMICS

05402, 05802, 06002

AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102, 05702

BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602,

04902

BASIC LINE 01402, 02102

BEAUMARK 02002, 05502

BELL & HOWELL

01602, 06102

BLAUPUNKT 01902, 04602, 04802,

05102, 05302

BRANDT 02402

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

00602

BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402

BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702

CALIX 00402, 05702

CANDLE 05402, 05502, 05702

CANNON 05602, 06402

CANON 00302

CARVER 01502

CCE 01402, 02102

CGE 00002, 04702

CIMLINE 01402

CINERAL 02102

CINEVISION 05702

CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302,

05402, 05502, 05702

COLORTYME 05402

COLT 01402

COMBITECH 02702

CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402,

02002, 05502, 05702

CROWN 01402, 02102

CURTIS MATHES

00302, 00602, 01202,

03702, 05402, 05502,

05602, 05902, 06402

CYBERNEX 02002, 05502

CYRUS 01502

DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102,

03402, 04302, 06302

DANSAI 01402

DBX 05402, 05802, 06002

DE GRAAF 00702

DECCA 00002, 01502, 04702

DEGRAAF 04702

DENON 00702

DIMENSIA 05602

DUAL 00602

DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602,

04702

DURABRAND 05702

DYNATECH 00002, 04702, 05902,

06302

ELCATECH 01402

ELECTROHOME

00402, 05702

ELECTROPHONIC

00402, 05702

EMEREX 00102

EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402,

00802, 00902, 01702,

02002, 02102, 04302,

04402, 04702, 05002,

05502, 05702, 05902,

06102, 06302, 06402

ESC 02002, 02102

FERGUSON 00602, 02402

FIDELITY 00002, 04702

FINLANDIA 01502, 01602

FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502,

01602, 04702, 04802,

04902

FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902,

01402

FISHER 01002, 01602, 05402,

06102

FUJI 00202, 00302, 06402

FUJITSU 00002, 00902

FUNAI 00002, 04702, 05902,

06302

GARRARD 00002, 06302

GE 00302, 01202, 02002,

03502, 03702, 03802,

05502, 05602, 06402

GEC 01502

GENERAL 00902

GO VIDEO 02802

GOLDHAND 01402

GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902,

04202, 05402, 05702,

05902

GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402,

02102, 04702

GO-VIDEO 05502

GRADIENTE 00002, 06302

GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002

GRANADA 01502, 01602

GRANADA (UK)

04602, 04802

GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402

GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902,

02502, 04602

HANSEATIC 00402

HARLEY DAVIDSON

00002, 06302

HARMAN KARDON

05402

HARMAN/KARDON

01502

HARWOOD 01402

HCM 01402

HEADQUARTER

05902, 06102, 06502,

06602

HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702,

05002

HI-Q 01002

HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602,

00702, 02002, 04702,

06202

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

00702

HYPSON 01402

IMPERIAL 00002, 04702

INSIGNIA 05702

INSTANT REPLAY

05902, 06402

INTEQ 05702

INTERFUNK 01502

ITT 00602, 01602, 02002,

04902

ITT-NOKIA 04902

ITV 00402, 02102

JC PENNEY 05402, 05502, 05602,

05702, 05802, 06002,

06102, 06202, 06402,

06502, 06602, 06702

JCL 06402

JENSEN 00602, 06202, 06602

JVC 00602, 00902, 01302,

05402, 05802, 06002,

06102, 06602

KAISUI 01402

KEC 00402, 02102

KENDO 04902

KENWOOD 00602, 01302, 05402,

05802, 06002, 06102,

06602

KLH 01402

KODAK 00302, 00402, 05702,

06402

KOLIN 00602, 00802

KORPEL 01402

LENCO 02102

LEYCO 01402

LG 00402, 00702, 00902,

02902, 05902

LLOYD 04702, 05902, 06302

LLOYD’S 00002

LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502

LOEWE OPTA 04602

LOGIK 01402, 02002

LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602,

04902

LXI 00402, 05702, 05902

M ELECTRONIC

00002, 04702

MAGNASONIC

04302

MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502,

01502, 05602, 05902,

06402

MAGNIN 02002, 05502

MANESTH 00902, 01402

MARANTZ 00302, 01502, 04602,

05402, 05802, 06002,

06102, 06402

MARTA 00402, 05702

MATSUI 02602, 02702, 05002

MATSUSHITA 00302, 06402

MEDION 02602

MEI 00302, 06402

MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402,

00502, 01002, 01102,

01602, 02002, 02202,

02602, 04202, 04702,

05502, 05702, 05902,

06102, 06302

06402

MEMPHIS 01402

METZ 00402, 02502, 04502,

04602, 05202

MGA 00802, 02002

MGN TECHNOLOGY

02002, 05502

MINERVA 04602

MINOLTA 00702, 06202, 06502

MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302,

01502, 03502, 05802,

06002, 06202

MOTOROLA 00302, 01102, 06402

MTC 00002, 02002, 04702,

05502, 05902, 06302

MULTITECH 00002, 01402, 04702,

05502, 05902, 06302

MURPHY 00002, 04702

MYRYAD 01502

NAD 01602

NATIONAL 01902, 04802

NEC 00302, 00402, 00602,

01102, 01302, 01602,

05402, 05802, 06002,

06102, 06602

NECKERMANN

01502, 04602, 05002

NESCO 01402

NEWAVE 00402

NIKKO 00402, 05702

NOBLEX 02002, 05502

NOBLIKO 04602

NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002,

04902

NORDMENDE

00602, 02402

OCEANIC 00002, 00602

OKANO 02302, 02602

OLYMPUS 00302, 01902, 04802,

06402

OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602,

02802, 05502, 05702

OPTONICA 05502

ORION 01702, 02602, 02702,

04402, 05002

OSAKA 04702

OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402,

04702

OTTO VERSAND

01502

PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402

PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902,

03102, 03702, 04502,

04802, 05102, 05302,

05602, 06402

PATHE MARCONI

00602

PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702,

02002, 03702, 04202

50 En

PENTAX 00702, 05402, 06202,

06502

PERDIO 00002, 04702

PHILCO 00302, 05602, 06402

PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202,

03902, 04002, 04602,

06402

PHONOLA 01502

PILOT 00402, 05702

PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502,

05802, 06002, 06202,

06702

POLK AUDIO 01502

PROFITRONIC 02002

PROLINE 00002, 04702

PROSCAN 01202, 03802, 05602

PROTEC 01402

PULSAR 00502

PYE 01502

QUARTER 06102

QUARTZ 06102

QUASAR 00302, 03702, 05602,

06402

QUELLE 01502, 04602, 04802,

05002

RADIO SHACK

05502, 05602, 05702,

05902, 06102, 06302,

06402

RADIOLA 01502

RADIOSHACK 00002

RADIX 00402, 05702

RANDEX 00402, 05702

RCA 00302, 00702, 01202,

02002, 03502, 03702,

03802, 05502, 05602,

05702, 06202, 06402,

06502

REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402,

01002, 01102, 01602,

04702, 05502, 05602,

05702, 05902, 06102,

06302, 06402

REOC 02602

REPLAYTV 03002, 03102

REX 00602

RIO 05702

ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002,

02102

RUNCO 00502

SABA 00602, 02402

SAISHO 05002

SALORA 00802

SAMPO 00402, 01102

SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802,

05502, 06202

SANKY 00502, 01102

SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302,

04402, 05802, 06002,

06602

SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002,

05502, 06102

SAVILLE 02702

SBR 01502

SCHAUB LORENZ

00002, 00602, 01602

SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502,

04702

SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702

SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402,

00702, 01002, 01602,

04202, 05702, 06102,

06202, 06402, 06502,

06702

SEG 02002

SEI 01502

SELECO 00602

SEMP 00902

SHARP 01102, 03502, 05902

SHINTOM 01402, 01602, 06202

SHOGUN 05502

SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602,

04602

SIGNATURE 05902

SILVA 00402

SINGER 00902, 01402, 06402

SINUDYNE 01502, 05202

SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102

SONTEC 00402

SONY 00002, 00102, 00202,

00302, 03302, 04102,

04702

STS 00702, 06202, 06402,

06502

SUNKAI 02602

SUNSTAR 00002, 04702

SUNTRONIC 00002

SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802,

01502, 04702, 05602,

05902, 06302, 06402

SYMPHONIC 00002, 04702, 05902,

06302

TANDBERG 05002, 05202

TANDY 00002, 01602, 05902,

06102

TASHIKO 00002, 00402, 04702,

05702

TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902,

01302, 01502, 04702,

06602

TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102,

02202, 03402, 04702,

05902, 06302, 06602

TECHNICS 00302, 01902, 04802,

06402

TECO 00302, 00402, 00602,

01102

TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402,

04702, 05702, 05902,

06302, 06402

TELEAVIA 00602

TELEFUNKEN

00602, 02402

TENOSAL 01402

TENSAI 00002

THOMAS 00002

THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302,

02402

THORN 00602, 01602

TIVO 03202, 03302

TMK 02002, 05002, 05502

TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902,

01302, 01502, 03602,

06202

TOTEVISION 00402, 02002, 05502,

05702

UHER 02002

UNITECH 02002, 05502

UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502,

02002

VECTOR 00902

VECTOR RESEARCH

05402, 05802, 06002

VICTOR 00602, 01302, 05802,

06002

VIDEO CONCEPTS

00902, 05402, 05802,

06002

VIDEOMAGIC 00402

VIDEOSONIC 02002, 05502

VILLAIN 00002

WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702,

01002, 01102, 01202,

01402, 01502, 02002,

05502, 05602, 05702,

05902, 06202, 06302,

06402, 06502

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

01402, 05902

XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402,

06302, 06402

YAMAHA 00602, 05402, 05802,

06002, 06602

YAMISHI 01402

YOKAN 01402

YOKO 02002

ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502,

04402, 05702, 05802,

05902, 06002

CABLE TV TUNER

ABC 00103, 00203, 02803,

04703

ADELPHIA 04503

ALLEGRO 02903, 03403

AMERICAST 02003

ANTRONIX 03703, 03803

ARCHER 03703, 03803, 04003,

04303

AT&T 04503

BELL SOUTH 02003

BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS

00803

BRITISH TELECOM

00103

CABLETENNA03703

CABLEVIEW 03703

CENTURY 04303

CITIZEN 04303

COGECO 04503

COMCAST 04503

COMTRONICS 03103

CONTEC 03503

DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903

DIRECTOR 01303

FILMNET 01203

GARRARD 04303

GC ELECTRONICS

03803

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

00103, 00803, 01303,

01703

GENERAL INSTRUMENT (GI)

02803, 04503, 04703,

04803

GOLDSTAR 00503

HAMLIN 00303, 00703

HITACHI 04703

JASCO 04303

JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303,

01703, 02803, 04203,

04703

LG 00503

MAGNAVOX 03203

MEMOREX 00003

MNET 01203

MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703,

02303, 02803, 04503,

04703, 04803

MOVIE TIME 03603

NOKIA 04903

NOOS 01803

NSC 03603

OAK 03503, 03903

PACE 00603, 02203

PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403,

02703

PARAGON 00003

PHILIPS 01003, 01103, 03203,

04303

PHILIPS-MAGNAVOX

03003, 03303

PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903

PULSAR 00003

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

00103

QUASAR 00003

RADIO SHACK

03003, 03303, 03403

RCA 02403, 02503, 04303

REALISTIC 03803

REGAL 00703, 00903

REMBRANDT 04703

RUNCO 00003

SAGEM 01803

SAMSUNG 00003, 00503

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

00203, 01403, 01903

SHAW 04503

SIGNATURE 04703

SONY 02103

STARCOM 00103

SUPERCABLE 00803

TANDY 04103

TELE+1 01203

TOCOM 02803, 04203, 04403,

04803

TORX 00103

TOSHIBA 00003

TRANS PX 00803

TS 00103

TV86 03603

UNIKA 03703, 03803, 04303

UNITED CABLE

00103

UNIVERSAL 02903, 03703, 03803,

04003, 04303, 04603

VIEWSTAR 03103, 03203, 03603,

04103

VERIZON FIOS

05003, 05103

ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003,

03403, 04303

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 06404

ABSAT 00104

ALBA 01404

ALPHASTAR 02504

AMSTRAD 03004

ASTON 00304, 05004

ASTRO 00604

ATSAT 06404

AVALON 01304

BLAUPUNKT 00604

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

03004, 05204

CANAL DIGITAL

03104

CANAL SATELLITE

03104

CANAL+ 03104

CHAPARRAL 00804

CITYCOM 05304

COMAG 09004, 09104, 09704,

10104, 10304, 11604,

11704, 11804, 12004

CONNEXIONS 01304

CROSSDIGITAL

04604

CYRUS 00704

DAERYUNG 01304

DAEWOO 06304

D-BOX 02104, 04904

DIGENIUS 01104

DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504,

01704, 02204, 02304,

02804, 04104, 04604,

05104, 06904

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

02604, 03704

DISHPRO 02604, 03704

DISTRATEL 00004

DMT 04004

DNT 00704, 01304

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

05804

DREAMBOX 08604, 08704, 09604,

09804, 09904, 10004,

10404, 10604

ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604,

02604, 03104, 03604,

03704, 04304

ENGEL 03804

EXPRESSVU 02604

FINLUX 01404

FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204,

07304, 07404

FRACARRO 03604

FTE 03404

FUBA 01304

GALAXIS 03404, 04704

GE 01504

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

03504, 08204, 08304

GOI 02604

GOLD BOX 03104

GRUNDIG 00604, 03004

HIRSCHMANN

00604, 01304

HITACHI 01404, 02804

HOUSTON 08504, 10704, 10804,

11004, 11104, 11304,

11904

HTS 02604

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

51 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION

02304, 05104, 06904

HUMAX 03404, 05304

INVIDEO 03604

JVC 02604

KATHREIN 00104, 00604, 00704,

01004, 01804, 05604

KREISELMEYER

00604

LABGEAR 06304

LOGIX 03804

LORENZEN 01104

MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204

MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204

MARANTZ 00704

MEDIASAT 03104

MEMOREX 02204

METRONIC 00004

MITSUBISHI 02304

MOTOROLA 03504

MYRYAD 00704

NEXT LEVEL 03504

NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404,

04904, 05704, 06804

OCTALTV 03704

ORBITECH 04504

PACE 01404, 03004, 05204,

06604

PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004,

06504

PANDA 01404

PAYSAT 02204

PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404,

02004, 02204, 02304,

03104, 04104, 05104,

06904

PIONEER 03104

PRIMESTAR 08204, 08304

PROMAX 01404

PROSCAN 01204, 01504

RADIOLA 00704

RADIOSHACK

03504

RADIX 01304

RCA 00404, 01204, 01504,

03204

RFT 00704

SABRE 01404

SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904

SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004,

06204

SAT CONTROL

06404

SATSTATION 04204

SCHWAIGER 04704

SEEMANN 01304

SIEMENS 00604

SKY 03004, 03304, 05204,

12104, 12204, 12304

SKY HD 12404

SKY MASTER 07504, 07604, 07704,

07804, 07904, 08004

SKY+ (SKY Digital +)

08104

STARCHOICE 08204, 08304

SM ELECTRONIC

05404

SMART 08804, 08904, 09204,

09304, 09404, 09504,

10204, 10304, 10504,

10904, 11204, 11404,

11504

SONY 01704, 03004, 06704

STAR CHOICE 03504

STRONG 06404

TANTEC 01404

TECHNISAT 04404, 04504

TELESTAR 04504

THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904,

06104

Tivo 08404

TOPFIELD 05504

TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904

TPS 02904, 05904

ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704

UNIDEN 02004, 02204

UNIVERSUM 00604

VENTANA 00704

WISI 00604, 01304, 01404

XSAT 00104

ZEHNDER 04004

ZENITH 03304

52 En

■ Numerics

2-channel source surround decode ............................... 24

3Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 24

5.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 23

5.1-channel source 7.1-channel decode ........................ 24

5Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 23

5BeamPlus2, beam mode ............................................. 24

7.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 24

■ A

AC IN jack ..................................................................... 8

AC ON STANDBY, ADVANCED SETUP ................ 38

Adaptive DRC, Dynamic range control ....................... 34

Adaptive dynamic range control, Dynamic range control

Adjusting volume level automatically UniVolume ...... 28

ADVANCED SETUP .................................................. 37

Adventure. CINEMA DSP program ............................ 23

Attaching stands, installation ....................................... 10

Audio / video component connection ........................... 13

AUDIO DELAY, SOUND SET MENU ...................... 33

Audio delay, SOUND SET MENU .............................. 33

AUDIO IN jacks ............................................................. 8

Audio Sampling, input signal information ................... 29

AUDIO SELECT, HDMI setup ................................... 36

Audio select, HDMI setup ............................................ 36

AUTO DIMMER, Front panel display setup ............... 36

Auto dimmer, Front panel display setup ...................... 36

AUTO LIP SYNC, Audio delay .................................. 33

Auto Preset, option menu ............................................. 29

AUTO SETUP .............................................................. 15

AUTO SETUP, Error messages ................................... 18

Automatic lipsync, Audio delay ................................... 33

Automatic preset, option menu .................................... 29

AUX1/2, Audio delay .................................................. 33

AV button, Remote control ............................................ 9

AV key, controlling external component ..................... 39

■ B

BASS EXT indicator ...................................................... 7

BASS EXTENSION, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34

Bass extension, SOUND SET MENU ......................... 34

BASS OUT, Subwoofer settings .................................. 33

Bass out, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33

Bass sound output redirection, Sound output ............... 35

BEAM ADJUSTMENT, MANUAL SETUP .............. 32

Beam adjustment, MANUAL SETUP ......................... 32

Beam mode, 5.1ch ........................................................ 23

Beam mode, 7.1ch ........................................................ 24

Blu-ray disc player connection ..................................... 12

■ C

cardboard microphone stand assemble ......................... 16

CENTER PRE OUT jack ............................................. 38

Center SP Size, Sound output ...................................... 35

Center speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output ........ 35

CH key, controlling external component ..................... 39

CH keys, Remote control ............................................... 9

CHANNEL LEVEL, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34

Channel level, SOUND SET MENU ........................... 34

CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................. 7

CINEMA DSP program keys, Remote control .............. 9

CINEMA DSP programs .............................................. 22

Clear preset station, option menu ................................. 29

Clear Preset, option menu ............................................ 29

CODE SET key, controlling external component ........ 39

CODE SET key, Remote control ................................... 9

Concert Hall. CINEMA DSP program ......................... 23

Configuring input source settings ................................ 28

Connecting audio / video components ......................... 13

Connecting Blu-ray disc player .................................... 12

Connecting external components ................................. 12

Connecting FM antenna ............................................... 13

Connecting subwoofer .................................................. 14

Connecting TV ............................................................. 12

Connections ................................................................. 12

Controlling external component .................................. 39

Corner installation, placement ..................................... 11

CROSS OVER, Subwoofer settings ............................ 33

Crossover, Subwoofer settings .................................... 33

Cursor keys, controlling external component .............. 39

Cursor keys, Remote control ......................................... 9

Customizing this unit ................................................... 30

■ D

Decoder indicators ................................................... 7, 21

Decoder Mode, option menu ....................................... 29

Decoder mode, option menu ........................................ 29

DEMO MODE, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 38

Demo mode, ADVANCED SETUP ............................ 38

DIGITAL IN jacks ......................................................... 8

Display language change ............................................. 15

DISPLAY MENU ........................................................ 36

Displaying input signal information ............................ 29

Displaying the Radio Data System information .......... 26

DISTANCE, Subwoofer settings ................................. 33

Distance, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33

Dolby Digital Plus, glossary ........................................ 43

Dolby Digital Surround EX, glossary .......................... 43

Dolby Digital, glossary ................................................ 43

Dolby Pro Logic II, glossary ....................................... 43

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, glossary ..................................... 43

Dolby Surround, glossary ............................................ 43

Dolby TrueHD, glossary .............................................. 43

Dolby/DTS DRC, Dynamic range control ................... 34

Drama. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23

DRC:Dynamic Range CTRL, SOUND SET MENU .. 34

DTS 96/24, glossary .................................................... 43

DTS Digital Surround, glossary .................................. 43

DTS Neo:6, glossary .................................................... 43

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, glossary ................. 43

DTS-HD Master Audio, glossary ................................ 43

Dynamic range control, SOUND SET MENU ............ 34

Dynamic range of Dolby Digitaland DTS signals,

Dynamic range control ............................................ 34

■ E

ENHANCER indicator .................................................. 7

ENTER key, controlling external component ............. 39

ENTER key, Remote control ......................................... 9

ENTERTAINMENT. CINEMA DSP program ........... 23

Entertainment. CINEMA DSP program ...................... 23

Error messages, AUTO SETUP .................................. 18

External amplifier using .............................................. 38

External component connection .................................. 12

External component control ......................................... 39

External component operation keys, controlling external

component ............................................................... 39

External component operation keys, Remote control .... 9

■ F

F.DISPLAY SETUP, DISPLAY MENU .................... 36

F.PANEL KEY, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 37

FACTORY PRESET, ADVANCED SETUP .............. 38

Factory preset, ADVANCED SETUP ......................... 38

FM antenna connection ................................................ 13

FM ANTENNA jack ...................................................... 8

FM Mode, option menu ............................................... 29

FM receiving mode, option menu ................................ 29

FM tuner, troubleshooting ........................................... 41

FM tuning .................................................................... 25

Frequency tuning, FM tuning ...................................... 25

Front panel ..................................................................... 6

Front panel display .................................................... 6, 7

Front panel display setup, DISPLAY MENU ............. 36

Front panel input key, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37

Front panel key, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 37

FRONT PRE OUT jacks ............................................. 38

Front SP Size, Sound output ........................................ 35

Front speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output .......... 35

■ G

Game. CINEMA DSP program .................................... 23

General, troubleshooting .............................................. 40

Group ID, Wireless setup ............................................. 36

■ H

HDMI control function ................................................ 28

HDMI CONTROL, INPUT MENU ............................. 36

HDMI control, INPUT MENU .................................... 36

HDMI indicator .............................................................. 7

HDMI jacks .................................................................... 8

HDMI SETUP, INPUT MENU ................................... 36

HDMI setup, INPUT MENU ....................................... 36

HDMI, Audio delay ..................................................... 33

HDMI, glossary ............................................................ 44

■ I

IMAGE LOCATION, MANUAL SETUP .................. 32

Image location, MANUAL SETUP ............................. 32

INFO key, Remote control ............................................. 9

INPUT ASSIGNMENT, INPUT MENU ..................... 35

Input assignment, INPUT MENU ................................ 35

Input channel indicators ........................................... 7, 22

INPUT key, Front panel ................................................. 6

INPUT MENU ............................................................. 35

INPUT RENAME, INPUT MENU .............................. 35

Input rename, INPUT MENU ...................................... 35

Input selector keys, Remote control ............................... 9

Input signal information display .................................. 29

Input source setting configuration ................................ 28

Installing batteries, remote control ............................... 14

IntelliBeam ................................................................... 15

INTELLIBEAM key, Remote control ........................... 9

INTELLIBEAM MIC jack ............................................. 6

iPod Interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36

iPod interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36

iPod, troubleshooting ................................................... 42

iPod/iPhone playback ................................................... 27

IR IN terminal ................................................................ 8

IR-OUT terminal ............................................................ 8

■ J

Jazz Club. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23

■ L

LANGUAGE SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................... 37

Language setup, DISPLAY MENU ............................. 37

LFE 0.1-channel, glossary ............................................ 44

LFE Level, Sound output ............................................. 35

LFE LEVEL, Subwoofer settings ................................ 33

Linear PCM, glossary ................................................... 44

Loading settings ........................................................... 19

Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT, Sound output .

Low-frequency effect level, Subwoofer settings ......... 33

■ M

MANUAL SETUP ....................................................... 31

MAX VOLUME SET, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37

Maximum volume setting, ADVANCED SETUP ....... 37

Mch Stereo. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23

MEMORY PROTECT, ADVANCED SETUP ........... 38

Memory protect, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 38

MENU key, controlling external component ............... 39

MENU key, Remote control .......................................... 9

MOVIE. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23

Movie. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23

Multi-information display .............................................. 7

MUSIC ENHANCER, SOUND SET MENU .............. 34

Music Video. CINEMA DSP program ........................ 23

MUSIC. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23

Index

53 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION APPENDIXPLAYBACK FEATURES SETTINGS

Music. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23

MUTE key, Remote control .......................................... 9

Muting audio output .................................................... 21

■ N

Numeric keys, controlling external component .......... 39

Numeric keys, Remote control ...................................... 9

■ O

Operation range, remote control .................................. 14

OPTION key, Remote control ....................................... 9

OSD BACK COLOR, OSD setup ............................... 37

OSD background color, OSD setup ............................ 37

OSD language change ................................................. 15

OSD SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................................ 37

OSD setup, DISPLAY MENU .................................... 37

OSD SHIFT, OSD setup ............................................. 37

OSD shift, OSD setup ................................................. 37

■ P

PANEL INP.KEY, ADVANCED SETUP .................. 37

Parallel installation, placement .................................... 11

PCM indicator ............................................................... 7

PCM, glossary ............................................................. 44

Playback ...................................................................... 21

Playing back iPod/iPhone ............................................ 27

Power key, Ffront panel ................................................ 6

Power key, Remote control ........................................... 9

Power LED .................................................................... 6

Power-on by remote control input keys, ADVANCED

SETUP .................................................................... 38

PRE OUT jacks ............................................................. 8

PRE OUT Volume, Sound output ............................... 35

PRE OUT volume, Sound output ................................ 35

Preset tuning, FM tuning ............................................. 25

■ R

R.INPUT POWER, ADVANCED SETUP ................. 38

Rack using, installation ............................................... 10

Radio Data System tuning ........................................... 26

Rear panel ...................................................................... 8

RECV, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7

Remote control .............................................................. 9

Remote control code list .............................................. 45

Remote control code resetting all ................................ 39

Remote control code setting ........................................ 39

Remote control preparation ......................................... 14

Remote control sensor ................................................... 6

Remote control, troubleshooting ................................. 41

Resetting all remote control code ................................ 39

Resolution, input signal information ........................... 29

RETURN key, controlling external component .......... 39

RETURN key, Remote control ..................................... 9

RS-232C terminal .......................................................... 8

■ S

Sampling frequency, input signal information ............ 29

Saving settings ............................................................. 19

Sci-Fi. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23

SET MENU ................................................................. 30

SET MENU operation ................................................. 31

Setting Loading ........................................................... 19

SETTING PARAMETERS, MANUAL SETUP ........ 31

Setting parameters, MANUAL SETUP ...................... 31

Setting remote control code ......................................... 39

Setting saving .............................................................. 19

SETUP key, Remote control ......................................... 9

SLEEP indicator ............................................................ 7

SLEEP key, Remote control .......................................... 9

Sleep timer ................................................................... 28

SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG, SOUND OUT MENU .

Sound beam output configuration, SOUND OUT MENU

SOUND OUT MENU ................................................. 34

SOUND OUT, SOUND OUT MENU ........................ 34

Sound output redirection, Sound output ...................... 35

Sound output, SOUND OUT MENU .......................... 34

SOUND SET MENU ................................................... 33

Specifications ............................................................... 44

Spectacle. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23

Sports. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23

ST+3BeamPlus2, beam mode ...................................... 24

Stand attachment, installation ...................................... 10

STANDARD DIMMER, Front panel display setup .... 36

Standard dimmer, Front panel display setup ............... 36

Standby after AC on, ADVANCED SETUP ............... 38

STEREO key, Remote control ....................................... 9

Stereo+3Beam, beam mode ......................................... 23

Subwoofer connection ................................................. 14

SUBWOOFER jack ....................................................... 8

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack .................................... 38

SUBWOOFER SET, SOUND SET MENU ................ 33

Subwoofer settings, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33

SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setup ................................ 36

Support audio, HDMI setup ......................................... 36

SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks ...................................... 38

SUR.DECODE key, Remote control ............................. 9

SURROUND key, Remote control ................................ 9

SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ..................................... 38

System configurations .................................................. 37

SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal ................................ 8

System memory using .................................................. 19

■ T

Table top stand/floor stand using, installation ............. 10

Talk Show. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23

TONE CONTROL, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33

Tone control, SOUND SET MENU ............................ 33

TOP MENU key, controlling external component ...... 39

TOP MENU key, Remote control .................................. 9

Transmission indicator, Remote control ........................ 9

TREBLE, Tone control ................................................ 33

Treble, Tone control .................................................... 33

TRNS, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7

Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40

Tuner indicators ............................................................. 7

Tuner operation keys, Remote control ........................... 9

TURN ON VOLUME, ADVANCED SETUP ............ 37

TV ................................................................................ 33

TV button, Remote control ............................................ 9

TV connection .............................................................. 12

TV INPUT key, controlling external component ........ 39

TV key, controlling external component ..................... 39

TV MUTE key, controlling external component ......... 39

TV operation keys, Remote control ............................... 9

TV VOL +/– key, controlling external component ...... 39

TV, Audio delay .......................................................... 33

■ U

UNIT SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ............................... 37

Unit setup, DISPLAY MENU ..................................... 37

UNIVOLUME indicator ................................................ 7

UNIVOLUME key, Remote control .............................. 9

■ V

VIDEO jacks .................................................................. 8

Video Signal In, input signal information ................... 29

VOLUME +/– keys, Front panel ................................... 6

VOLUME +/– keys, Remote control ............................. 9

Volume level at power-on, ADVANCED SETUP ...... 37

Volume level indicator ................................................... 7

Volume Trim, option menu ......................................... 29

Volume trim, option menu ........................................... 29

■ W

wall mount bracket using, installation ......................... 10

Wireless Function, Wireless setup ............................... 36

Wireless function, Wireless setup ................................ 36

Wireless indicators ......................................................... 7

WIRELESS SETUP, INPUT MENU .......................... 36

Wireless setup, INPUT MENU ................................... 36

■ X

x.v.Color, glossary ....................................................... 44

YC174B0/OMEN2

Documenttranscriptie

Digital Sound ProjectorTM Owner’s Manual English for Europe, Asia, Africa, Oceania, and Latin America The “ Corporation. ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of Yamaha Manufactured under license from Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of Cambridge Mechatronics Ltd. The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. The “ ” and “UniVolume” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a trademark. The “ ” and “AirWired” are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. “Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. About this manual • Make sure you read precautions in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet) carefully before using this unit. • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • An illustration of the remote control in the left pages of this manual indicates the keys to be used in two facing (left and right) pages. • This manual is produced prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. 2 En INTRODUCTION CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Features........................................................................... 4 General operation flow .................................................. 5 Controls and functions................................................... 6 PREPARATION Installation .................................................................... 10 Connections................................................................... 12 Before connecting components ........................................12 Connecting external components .....................................12 Connecting a subwoofer...................................................13 Connecting the FM antenna .............................................14 Preparing the remote control ...................................... 14 Changing OSD language.............................................. 15 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)....................................... 15 SET MENU items............................................................ 30 Basic SET MENU operation............................................ 31 MANUAL SETUP........................................................... 31 SOUND SET MENU....................................................... 33 SOUND OUT MENU...................................................... 34 INPUT MENU................................................................. 35 DISPLAY MENU............................................................ 36 System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) ......... 37 Using an external amplifier ......................................... 38 Controlling external components ............................... 39 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40 Glossary......................................................................... 43 Specifications ................................................................ 44 List of remote control codes ........................................ 45 Index .............................................................................. 52 PLAYBACK FEATURES Installing batteries in the remote control..........................14 Operation range of the remote control .............................14 Customizing this unit (SET MENU)........................... 30 PREPARATION Front panel .........................................................................6 Front panel display.............................................................7 Rear panel...........................................................................8 Remote control ...................................................................9 SETTINGS Installing the IntelliBeam microphone.............................15 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ................................16 Using the system memory ............................................ 19 Saving settings .................................................................19 Loading settings ...............................................................19 PLAYBACK FEATURES Playback ........................................................................ 21 Playing back sources ........................................................21 Playing back TV sounds...................................................21 Playing back a player .......................................................21 Muting audio output.........................................................21 Decoder and input channel indicators ..............................21 Playback mode.............................................................. 22 SETTINGS Selecting surround or stereo playback .............................22 Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs..................................22 Changing the audio output method for surround playback........................................................................23 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...............24 Playing back 5.1-channel sources in 7.1-channel surround ....................................................24 FM tuning ..................................................................... 25 Tuning into the desired FM station (Frequency tuning) .......................................................25 Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).....25 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only).....................................................26 Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 27 Useful features .............................................................. 28 APPENDIX Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume).......28 Using the HDMI™ control function ................................28 Using the sleep timer........................................................28 Configuring settings for each input source (Option menu) ..............................................................28 Displaying the input signal information...........................29 3 En INTRODUCTION Features Digital Sound Projector The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multichannel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo+3 Beam, 3 Beam for 5.1-channel audio, 5 Beam plus 2, Stereo + 3 Beam plus 2, 3 Beam for 7.1-channel audio) and 2-channel stereo playback. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI input x 4, HDMI output x 1 ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability – Multi-channel Linear PCM signal capability ◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components ◆ Functional link which enables the remote control of your TV to control this unit (with an HDMI control-compatible TV) – Power mode switch capability (on/standby) – Volume adjustment capability – TV sounds reproduce device selection capability (this unit/TV) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Cinema DSP This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the original dramatic sound impact. UniVolume This unit employs the automatic volume adjustment function. You can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to commercials, etc.). Various digital audio decoders includes newly added HD audio decoder, and sound technologies ◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, Pro Logic IIx ◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, DTS, DTS-ES (discrete and matrix), DTS Neo: 6 ◆ Music Enhancer to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format ◆ Bass Extension to produce powerful bass sounds Sophisticated FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning Radio Data System (Europe model only) This unit employs the Radio Data System that is a data transmission system used by FM stations. 4 En Wireless connection (AirWired) ◆ Wireless connection with iPod/iPhone, using Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC) ◆ Wireless connection with subwoofer, using Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10) (not available in some countries) ◆ iPod/iPhone interlock feature to turn on/off this unit or switch the input source in conjunction with iPod/iPhone operations Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control external components connected to this unit. INTRODUCTION General operation flow 2 Run AUTO SETUP to optimize the beam and sound settings. “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” (page 15). 3 Play back a source. “Playback” (page 21). 4 Change the playback method (surround/stereo), CINEMA DSP and/or beam modes settings. “Playback mode” (page 22). 5 Configure this unit’s settings and/or set remote control codes. “Customizing this unit (SET MENU)” (page 30), “Controlling external components” (page 39). PLAYBACK FEATURES Install this unit and connect to other components. “Installation” (page 10), “Connections” (page 12). PREPARATION 1 SETTINGS APPENDIX 5 En Controls and functions Front panel 12 4 5 INPUT VOLUME 1 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control (page 14). 2 Power LED Lights up when the power is turned on (page 21). 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (page 7). 4 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources. 5 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) 6 En 3 6 7 INTELLIBEAM MIC 6 Power (p) key Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (page 21). Note • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI signals. 7 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (page 15). INTRODUCTION Front panel display 12 3 4 5 TRNS RECV 7 q DIGITAL PLUS q EX PCM q TRUE HD q PL x A 96 24 HD MSTR HI RES Neo:6 ES DSCRT MTRX SLEEP O UNIVOLUME ENHANCER BASS EXT 0 89 m ft dB B C VOL L C R SL SB SR EX1 LFE EX2 D 8 SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (page 28). 2 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program is selected (page 22). 9 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 3 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input from the HDMI IN jack(s). 0 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (page 34). 5 Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) Show the current Radio Data System status (page 26). 6 Wireless indicators TRNS Lights up when a wireless connection is established between the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWKW10) and this unit (page 13). RECV Lights up when a wireless connection is established between the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX50TX) and this unit (page 27). PLAYBACK FEATURES 1 UNIVOLUME indicator Lights up when the UniVolume function is turned on (page 28). 4 Tuner indicators Light up when this unit is tuned into an FM station (page 25). PREPARATION TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS PTY RT CT 6 A BASS EXT indicator Lights up when the bass extension mode is turned on (page 34). B PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. C Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. Current input source and audio output method are displayed when this unit is turned on. D Input channel indicators The channel component of the current input signal is displayed (page 21). 7 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (page 21). SETTINGS APPENDIX 7 En Rear panel A B 1 OUT HDMI IN 1 FRONT SURROUND IR-OUT SUR. BACK PRE OUT IN 2 IN 3 OUT HDMI 0 IN 1 IN 4 IN 2 COMPONENT PR PB VIDEO Y IN VIDEO IN 3 SUB WOOFER VIDEO OUT L L R R AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN SYSTEM CONNECTOR AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN IN 4 TV IR IN RS-232C L CENTER R R R SUB WOOFER FRONT L SURROUND L SUR. BACK IR-OUT AC IN PRE OUT 3 FM ANTENNA COMPONENT 2 IN 45 6 7 8 9 SUB WOOFER SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT VIDEO AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV IR IN RS-232C Note • The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. 1 HDMI jacks Connect your HDMI components (page 12). 7 IR IN terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. 2 FM ANTENNA jack Connect the FM antenna (page 14). 8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal to this unit (page 13). 3 VIDEO jacks Connect to the video jacks of your external components (page 12). 4 SUBWOOFER jack Connect your subwoofer (page 13). 5 AUDIO IN jacks Connect to the analog audio output jacks of your external components (page 12). 6 DIGITAL IN jacks Connect to the digital audio output jacks of your external components (page 12). 8 En 9 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. 0 AC IN Connect the supplied power cable (page 12). A IR-OUT terminal This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. B PRE OUT jacks Connect your external amplifier (page 38). INTRODUCTION Remote control A AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE MUSIC ENTER TAINMENT E CINEMA DSP program keys Select the CINEMA DSP programs (page 22). C F SURROUND/STEREO Switches between surround and stereo playback (page 22). D OFF E CINEMA DSP SURROUND B STEREO F ENTER TOP MENU MENU SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP H MENU Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39). I OPTION Displays the option menu (page 28). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). J K I RETURN Returns to the previous menu screen (page 31). L J CH / Changes the channels of your TV/recorder (page 39). M K VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (page 21). N K MUTE Mutes the sound. (page 21). O L TV operation keys Use to control your TV (page 39). P M UNIVOLUME Turns on or off the UniVolume function (page 28). MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM H TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD (page 39). I SETUP Displays the SETUP menu (page 30). Press and hold to directly enter the LANGUAGE SETUP menu (page 15). Lights up when the remote control is turned into the setting mode of the main unit. I UNIVOLUME G Cursor ( / / / ) keys, ENTER Select and adjust menu items. Q R • When operating the keys located on the slide cover (INFO, SLEEP, etc.), close the slide cover completely before operation. A Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. B TV (p) Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode (page 39). C Power (p) key Turns on the power of this unit or set it to the standby mode (page 21). M INTELLIBEAM Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (page 16). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). N Numeric keys Use to enter numbers. O CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 39). P Tuner / external component operation keys Use to select or preset an FM station or control playback of your external components (pages 25 and 39). Q SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (page 28). R INFO Displays information about signals currently input to this unit (page 29). Select the desired Radio Data System display mode (Europe model only) (page 26). APPENDIX B AV (p) Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby mode (page 39). M SUR.DECODE Selects a decoder for surround playback (page 24). The remote control turns to setting mode (ISETUP lights up). SETTINGS Note PLAYBACK FEATURES OPTION G PREPARATION TV D Input selector keys Use to select an input source (page 21). An input source key currently selected lights up when the remote control is operated. 9 En PREPARATION Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. To achieve desired surround sound effects, install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams (page 11). Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (page 12) should be done before installation. ■ Using a wall mount bracket Notes • Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. We recommend installing this unit using a wall mount bracket, a rack, a table top stand or a floor stand. • Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • If the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. You can use the optional wall mount bracket (such as SPM-K30) to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. Attachment of the wall mount bracket: refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the wall mount bracket. Wall mount bracket ■ Attach the stands Attach the supplied stands to this unit as shown below. Make sure that you attach the left and right stands correctly. These stands are unnecessary if you use the optional wall mount bracket. This unit Right stand (supplied) TV Dimensions when using SPM-K30 YSP-5100 235 355 355 235 26 Left stand (supplied) 92 112 24- 7x22 74 4- 7 Screws (for stands, supplied) 730 SPM-K30 (Option) Note 150 355 355 150 26 • Depending on a rack, table top stand, or floor stand, the stands may not be necessary. 92 112 24- 7x22 74 ■ Using a rack You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. It should be large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit and strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. 4- 7 (mm) 730 YSP-4100 When this unit is installed above your TV TV 18 107 (mm) This unit ■ Using a table top stand or a floor stand You can mount both your TV and this unit on a commercially available table top stand or floor stand. When this unit is installed under your TV 10 En INTRODUCTION ■ Ideal installation condition : Object such as furniture Parallel installation (with 5 Beam) Corner installation (with Stereo+3Beam) 40° to 50° PREPARATION ■ For better listening environment Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. PLAYBACK FEATURES Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. SETTINGS Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. APPENDIX 11 En Connections Component video pin cable Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections The symbols on the left of cable names (such as , , and ) correspond with the symbols described in “Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player” (page 12) and “Connecting audio video components” (page 13). ■ Information on HDMI An HDMI cable can transmit both audio and video signals at the same time. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections. See also: “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28), “INPUT MENU” (page 35) For audio and video HDMI cable Input source For audio Audio pin cable (supplied) Audio signal type Blu-ray disc HD DVD Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM DVD audio 2-channel PCM, multi-channel PCM y Optical cable (supplied) • This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT jack. • The HDMI of this unit supports High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP), • We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it. Digital audio pin cable (supplied) ■ Priority order for audio input signals When digital and analog audio signals are simultaneously input from a single source component, this unit plays back digital audio signals by priority. For example, if audio signals are input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) and AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks simultaneously, this unit plays back audio signals input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack when “AUX1” is selected as the input source. For video Video pin cable (supplied) Connecting external components Connect external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) to this unit. Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. ■ Connecting your TV and Blu-ray disc player The following connection example shows a way to connect your TV and Blu-ray disc player by using the HDMI jacks. When you connect them by using the other jacks, refer to “Connecting audio and video components” (page 13). The symbols beside the cables correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12). Blu-ray disc player TV OUT HDMI output HDMI IN 1 1. Pull out the cap (if attached) Optical digital output HDMI input IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 2. Check the direction AUX 2 AUX 1 TV Power cable DIGITAL IN to AC wall outlet 12 En Determine the connection types depending on the jacks available on this unit and your external components. The symbols in the following table correspond with the symbols described in “Cables used for connections” (page 12). HDMI IN 1 IN 2 COMPONENT PR PB VIDEO Y IN VIDEO VIDEO IN/OUT jacks IN 3 SUB WOOFER L L VIDEO R R OUT AUX 1 TV SYSTEM CONNECTOR AUX 2 AUDIO IN AUX 1 DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN IN 4 TV IR IN RS-232C DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN jacks DIGITAL IN jacks Jacks to use External component Signal type On external component TV PREPARATION VIDEO On this unit HDMI IN jacks Cable to use Input selection key Composite video input VIDEO OUT Audio Analog audio output AUDIO IN (TV) TV External component with HDMI output Audio/video HDMI output HDMI IN 1-4 HDMI1-4 External component with component video output Audio Coaxial digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) AUX2 Video Component video output VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) External component with composite video output Audio Optical digital output DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) Analog audio output AUDIO IN (AUX 1) Composite video output VIDEO IN (VIDEO) PLAYBACK FEATURES Video Video INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting audio and video components AUX1 y • Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (VIDEO) jack can be output not only to the VIDEO OUT jack but also the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals input from the VIDEO IN (COMPONENT) jacks are output to the HDMI OUT jack. Connecting a subwoofer Wireline connection Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit. SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT AUX 1 TV AUDIO IN AUX 2 AUX 1 DIGITAL IN TV IR IN SETTINGS SUB WOOFER Wireless connection You can make a wireless connection of your subwoofer by using the Yamaha wireless subwoofer kit (SWK-W10). About SWK-W10, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). See also: “WIRELESS SETUP” (page 36) RS-232C INPUT VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC Subwoofer SWK-W10 Monaural input System connector y • For proper transmission, you need to set the group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 to the same value. For the Group ID settings, refer to “Group ID” (page 36) and “Safety and Accessory Information (separate booklet)”. • If the subwoofer is connected by using a system type connection, changing the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer (Yamaha subwoofer). APPENDIX y Note • Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased. 13 En Connecting the FM antenna Connect the supplied FM antenna or your antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit. Antenna TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME FM ANTENNA G ENTER INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT I Preparing the remote control Note • Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make sure that you read precautions on the remote control and batteries in “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). CODE SET Installing batteries in the remote control TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Operation range of the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. SLEEP Pull and hold INPUT Within 6m (20ft) GENTER G / ISETUP 14 En 1 Pull and hold the tab on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (R03P, UM4, AAA) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 Close the battery cover. 30° 30° VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC INTRODUCTION Changing OSD language You can select an OSD language among English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch and Russian. Before operating the following steps, select this unit as the video input on your TV. 1 3)LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 2 Press G / to select the desired language and then press GENTER. Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) Initial setting: ENGLISH (English) 3 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. Changing OSD language AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory PREPARATION Press and hold ISETUP until the “LANGUAGE SETUP” menu appears on your TV. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) PLAYBACK FEATURES This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams off the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep the IntelliBeam microphone away from direct sunlight. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of this unit. • You cannot use the AUTO SETUP when “PREOUT” is selected in “SOUND OUT” (page 35). • You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. About PDX-50TX, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). Installing the IntelliBeam microphone Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and place it in a proper location. 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. y • Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. IntelliBeam microphone Upper limit Center height of this unit Within 1 m (3.3 ft) INPUT VOLUME Within 1 m (3.3 ft) SETTINGS Cardboard microphone stand 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more Listening position Lower limit INTELLIBEAM MIC INTELLIBEAM MIC 2 APPENDIX Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface at your normal listening position. Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Center line Cardboard microphone stand IntelliBeam microphone 15 En ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand 1 TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC 2 Remove “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” CINEMA DSP STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME I 3 TV Fit in Place horizontally 4 TV MUTE UNIVOLUME INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M Notes 5 PRESET INFO MEMORY (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. You must optimize the beam angle with “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” before starting “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about three minutes. • It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. For accurate measurement, turn off air conditioner or other devices that make noises. • To achieve the best results possible, vacate your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY”. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY”. CODE SET TUNING (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. OFF Fit in SURROUND “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” Run through SLEEP y • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover frequency controls is connected to this unit, turn it on, set the volume to about half way and then set the crossover frequency to the maximum as shown below. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER HIGH CUT MIN y • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press IRETURN. 1 Press ISETUP. The remote control keys to be used and available operations in each step are displayed at the bottom of the screen. MAX Subwoofer SET MENU Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) p You can select one of the following AUTO SETUP types depending on your purpose. p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” GENTER G / IRETURN ISETUP MINTELLIBEAM 16 En (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time • If the unit has been relocated • If your listening room has been restructured • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged This menu takes about three minutes. y • You can also start the “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” procedure simply by holding down MINTELLIBEAM for more than two seconds. In this case, proceed to step 4. y Press G / to select “AUTO SETUP” and then press GENTER. B)AUTO SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press G / to select “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ”, “BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY” or “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” and then press GENTER. 6 Press GENTER to confirm the results. The menu screen disappears in two seconds. Changing OSD language AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory PREPARATION • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, refer to “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18), press IRETURN, and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • If “SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit and turned on, check the connection and then increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angles of front right and left and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “BEAM MODE :5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY 3)SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY 3 INTRODUCTION 2 AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel Prepare to leave the room. The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing GENTER in step 5. y PLAYBACK FEATURES 4 AUTO SETUP COMPLETE Please remove the MIC from the unit and the listening position. y • If you do not want to reflect the results, press IRETURN. 7 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press IRETURN. INPUT 5 VOLUME INTELLIBEAM MIC Press GENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure and then leave the room within 10 seconds. AUTO SETUP START The measurement results are stored in the internal memory of this unit until you run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or configure the settings manually. Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room *-------[RETURN]:Cancel SETTINGS The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. If an error occurs, an error buzzer sounds and an error message is displayed. For details on error messages, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” (page 18). If the AUTO SETUP procedure is complete, this unit rings the chimes. XXXXXXXXSHOW RESULTXXXXXXXXXX MEASUREMENT COMPLETE BEAM MODE :5Beam/Plus2 SUBWOOFER :YES APPENDIX [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. 17 En ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC If an error message is displayed on your TV, check the error message list to solve the problem and then follow the procedure below. [ERROR E-1]: Press GENTER to run the AUTO SETUP procedure again or IRETURN to cancel the operation Other errors: Press IRETURN to cancel the operation and then run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. Note OFF If the problem is difficult to be solved, configure the settings manually in “MANUAL SETUP” (page 31). CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT I Error message Cause Remedy See page ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit or disconnected during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit firmly. 15 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of the unit and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 15 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 15 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 15 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY GENTER G / IRETURN ISETUP 18 En SLEEP INTRODUCTION Using the system memory You can save the current beam and sound settings in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. y Saving settings 1 5 Press ISETUP. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving... p p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PLAYBACK FEATURES Press GENTER. Loading settings A)MEMORY 1 Press ISETUP. 1)LOAD 2)SAVE SET MENU p p p Press G / to select “SAVE” and then press GENTER. 2 p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 3 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory SET MENU 2 Press GENTER. The current beam and sound settings are saved to the selected memory number. Changing OSD language PREPARATION • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. While the curtains are open, run “BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY1”. 2. While the curtains are closed, run “SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY” (page 16) and then save the settings to “MEMORY2”. Press GENTER. 2)MEMORY SAVE A)MEMORY a)MEMORY1 b)MEMORY2 c)MEMORY3 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SETTINGS 4 Press G / to select the desired memory number and then press GENTER. 2)MEMORY SAVE 3 Press GENTER again. 1)MEMORY LOAD a)MEMORY1 b)MEMORY2 c)MEMORY3 MEMORY1 Save Now? p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter APPENDIX y • If system settings are already stored in the selected memory number, this unit overwrites the old settings. 19 En 4 C TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Press G / to select the memory number to be loaded and then press GENTER. D 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME K TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME 5 Press GENTER. The beam and sound settings saved in the selected memory number are loaded. MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP CPower DAUX1/2 DHDMI1 DHDMI1-4 DInput selector keys DTV GENTER G Push [ENTER] to Load MENU / KMUTE KVOLUME +/– 20 En 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Loading... INTRODUCTION PLAYBACK FEATURES Playback Playing back sources 1 Press CPower (p) key to turn on this unit. 2 Turn on external components (TV, Blu-ray disc player, etc.) connected to this unit. 3 Press one of the DInput selector keys to select an external component as an input source. Input source name y • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display (page 35). 4 5 Start playback of the external component that you have selected as the input source, or select a radio station on the tuner. • FM tuning (page 25) • Playing back iPod/iPhone (page 27) Press KVOLUME +/– to adjust the volume. Volume Volume 40 6 Press CPower (p) key to turn this unit to the standby mode. 1 Select the desired TV channel. 2 Press DTV to select the TV as the input source. 3 Mute the sound output on the TV. 2 Press DHDMI1-4 or DAUX1/2 to select the player as the input source. For example, if the player is connected to the HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit, press DHDMI1. 3 Start playback of the player. 4 Mute the sound output on the TV. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using the system memory Playback y • If your player supports the HD audio, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to the value which supports HD audio output (“Auto”, “Bitstream”, etc.). • If your player does not support the HD audio, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to multi-channel linear PCM. • If your player is connected to this unit through the digital connection, check whether the audio output setting on the player is set to digital output (“Bitstream”, “Dolby Digital”, “DTS”, etc.). • To enhance the surround sound effect, set the audio setting of your player to the multi-channel audio mode. • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input from the player through the digital Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ Useful features connection (HDMI, optical or coaxial). The DIGITAL indicator lights up when this unit detects the digital audio signal input. Muting audio output 1 Press KMUTE to mute the audio output. 2 Press KMUTE again to resume audio output. Decoder and input channel indicators SETTINGS Playing back TV sounds Select the player as the video input on the TV. PLAYBACK FEATURES HDMI1 1 Changing OSD language PREPARATION This section describes how to playback source input from your external components. For details on your external components, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Playing back a player ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected decoder, the indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: APPENDIX 21 En Status When PCM signals are being input TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod MOVIE OFF PCM E y • You can select an audio signal to be played back (Auto or DTS) In “Decoder Mode” (page 29). ■ Input channel indicators When Dolby TrueHD signals are being input FM ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Indicator Center Front L When Dolby Digital Plus signals are being input Surround L CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME F MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET I Extra 1 When Dolby Digital signals are being input DIGITAL When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround decoder PL When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround decoder PL PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP C R Front R SL SB SR Surround R EX1 LFE EX2 Extra 2 Depending on the channel component of the current digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Input signal Indicator 2-channel stereo When DTS HD Master Audio signals are being input + HD + MSTR When DTS HD High Resolution signals are being input + HD + HI RES When DTS 96/24 signals are being input L LFE When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is selected as the surround decoder 5.1-channel When DTS digital signals are being input TUNING Surround back 6.1-channel + 7.1-channel When DTS ES discrete is selected as the surround decoder + ES + DSCRT When DTS ES matrix is selected as the surround decoder + ES + MTRX When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround decoder + Neo:6 y • Extra (EX1/EX2) indicators light up when 7.1-channnel signals recorded in a Blu-lay disc (etc.) are being input. Normally, surround back channel signals are recorded in the extra channels. This may vary depending on the disc. Playback mode You can select the playback method (surround or stereo), desired CINEMA DSP program and decoder to enjoy playback of the input source. Selecting surround or stereo playback Use to select the playback method (surround or stereo). See also: “ Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs” (page 22), “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23). Press FSURROUND or FSTEREO. You can enjoy high realistic sensation with surround playback and hi-fi sound with stereo playback. ECINEMA DSP y EOFF • Normal sounds (not sound beams) are output from the front right and front left channels. When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front right and left channels are mixed down and output from the front right and left channels. • When the stereo playback is selected, CINEMA DSP (page 22) and the decoder (page 24) become ineffective. FSTEREO FSURROUND GENTER G G / / G ISETUP 22 En Enjoying CINEMA DSP programs This unit is equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments of famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y • When you enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs, press F SURROUND to select the surround playback, and then follow the steps below. • The CINEMA DSP programs are not available in the following conditions. – Stereo playback is selected. – HD audio signals are being played back. – Audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz are being played back. – Audio signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks. Press the desired ECINEMA DSP key. The CINEMA DSP category name appears in the front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator (page 7) lights up. 2 While the category name is displayed, press the ECINEMA DSP key repeatedly. Each time you press the key, program switches. ■ Movie (MOVIE) Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialogs and special sound effects of the latest science fiction films and lets you feel a broad and expansive cinematic space. Adventure This program reproduces the thrilling environment of the latest action films and lets you feel the dynamic and excitement of fast-moving scenes. Changing the audio output method for surround playback You can set the number of beam output channels and audio output method. 1 Press ISETUP. The “SET MENU” screen appears on the TV. 2 Use G / and GENTER to select “SOUND OUT MENU”- “SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG” - “CHANNEL OUT”. 3 Press G / to select the number of output channels. Choices: 5.1ch, 7.1ch Initial setting: 7.1ch ■ Music (MUSIC) Music Video This program produces a vibrant environment and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 4 Press G Concert Hall This program creates a rich surround effect of a large round concert hall with a great deal of presence, emphasizing the extension of sounds, and lets you feel as if you are seated close to the center of the stage. 5 Press G to select the desired audio output method. 6 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. Jazz Club This program recreates the acoustic environment of “The Bottom Line”, a famous jazz club in New York once and lets you feel as if you are seated right in front of the stage. Playback Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ to select “BEAM MODE”. PLAYBACK FEATURES Spectacle This program reproduces the wide and grand environment and lets you have added impressions on spectacular scenes with strong visual impacts. Mch Stereo This program downmixes multi-channel source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers and produces stereo sounds in wide range. It is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PREPARATION y • To turn off the CINEMA DSP program, press EOFF. Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It utilizes the sound field effects for movies to represent the depth and spatial feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. INTRODUCTION 1 Useful features ■ Beam modes for “5.1ch” 5 Beam ■ Entertainment (ENTERTAINMENT) Talk Show This program reproduces excitement of live talk shows. It enhances the ambience of gaiety while keeping the conversations at a comfortable volume. Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center, and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch 5.1-channel audio discs. Stereo+3Beam APPENDIX Drama This program stables reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies, and offers an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words. SETTINGS Sports This program reproduces the energetic environment of live sports broadcasting, converging a commentator’s voice on the center and broadening the overall atmosphere of the stadium, and lets you feel as if you are seated at an actual stadium or a ball park. Outputs normal sound from the front right and left channels and sound beams from the center and surround right and left channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. 23 En 3 Beam TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC OFF y STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 7.1-channel or 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the decoder. D CINEMA DSP SURROUND I Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources, surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall. ■ Beam modes for “7.1ch” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M MEMORY 2ch → 5ch Recommended source Decoder Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) N P INFO Press MSUR.DECODE repeatedly to switch between decoders. 5Beam Plus2 CODE SET PRESET • The decoders are available only when surround playback (page 22) is selected. • Available decoders vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT” setting (page 23). MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM TUNING Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound SLEEP Outputs sound beams from the front right and left, center, and surround back right and left channels. Surround right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left and surround back right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch 7.1-channel audio discs. ST+3BeamPlus2 — All sources PLII (Dolby Pro Logic II) Movie Music Game Movies Music Games Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Cinema Music Movies Music 2ch → 7ch Recommended source Decoder PLIIx (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) Movie Music Game Movies Music Games Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Cinema Music Movies Music Playing back 5.1-channel sources in 7.1-channel surround Outputs normal sound from the front right and left channels and sound beams from the center and surround back right and left channels. Surround right and left channel sounds are output by using front right and left channel sound and surround back right and left sound beams. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. This unit decodes 5.1-channel sources and then playback them in up to 7.1-channel surround. One of the following decoders is automatically selected depending on the input signals. Set “CHANNEL OUT” to “7.1ch” (page 23). 5.1ch input source Decoder PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie/ Music DTS ES matrix DRADIO DTS Digital, DTS ES matrix, DTS HD Master Audio, DTS HD High Resolution Audio GENTER DTS ES discrete DTS ES discrete 3 Beam G / y IOPTION IRETURN MSUR.DECODE NNumeric keys PTUNING PMEMORY 24 En / Outputs sound beams from the front right and left and center channels. For playback of multi-channel sources, surround right and left and surround back right and left channel sources are mixed into the front right and left channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall. • Press MSUR.DECODE to switch between Dolby Pro Logic Movie and Music. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder, select “PLIIxMusic”. To switch to the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder, select one of the decoders other than “PLIIxMusic”. INTRODUCTION FM tuning The FM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Note • Frequency tuning mode You can tune into a desired FM station by searching or specifying its frequency. • Preset tuning mode You can preset the frequencies of FM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune into. y • The reception is noisy and the sound is hard to listen, switch to monaural mode to get better reception. In the option menu, select “Mono” in “FM Mode” (page 29). Note Adjust the FM antenna connected to this unit for the best reception. Tuning into the desired FM station (Frequency tuning) 1 Note • If you select “FM” with INPUT on the front panel, press DFM on the remote control prior to step 2 so that you can operate the procedures from step 2. 2 Press PTUNING / to specify the frequency. The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned into a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. See also: “FM Mode” (page 29) Registering FM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) Playback You can register up to 40 FM stations automatically or manually. ■ Registering stations automatically Playback mode The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. FM tuning Note • Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by automatic station registration. 1 Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. 2 Press IOPTION. The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel display. 3 Press G / to select “Auto Preset” and then press GENTER. Lights up Playing back iPod™ PLAYBACK FEATURES Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. PREPARATION • When you press NNumeric keys during preset tuning, a preset number is selected. Set the tuner to the frequency tuning mode using PTUNING / prior to the operation. • You do not need to enter zero if it comes at the end of a decimal number. For example, enter “889” for “88.90 MHz” or “94” for “94.00 MHz”. Useful features TUNED STEREO XXXFMX88.90MHz 3.Auto Preset The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press PTUNING / . This unit starts to preset FM radio stations in 5 seconds. When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. To directly specify the frequency, use NNumeric keys to enter the frequency of the station. P01:FM 87.50MHz Preset number Frequency y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing G / after pressing GENTER. • To cancel the operation, press IRETURN. If auto preset is complete, “Preset Complete” appears. 4 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. ■ Registering stations manually APPENDIX 3 SETTINGS When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. AUTO MEMORY You can manually register FM stations with weak signals. 1 Tune into the desired FM station. 2 Press PMEMORY. 25 En “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. 4 Press G / to select a preset station to be cleared, and then press GENTER. The selected preset station is cleared. If the operation is completed, “Cleared” appears. To clear the multiple preset stations, repeat step 4. 5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. y TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D OFF 3 CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU • By holding down PMEMORY for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME I Press PPRESET / to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a preset number to which any station has been already registered, the frequency of the station is displayed. K TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME P02:Empty SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT Preset number N y • You can also specify a preset number using the NNumeric keys. CODE SET P TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. MEMORY MUTE 1 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) 4 SLEEP Press PMEMORY. When registration is complete, the front panel display returns to the original state. y R • To cancel registration, press IRETURN or leave this unit without any operations for about 30 seconds. ■ Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) You can call preset stations registered automatically or manually. Press PPRESET preset number. / to select the desired Notes • You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired station manually (page 25). • In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. 1 y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped. • “No Presets” is displayed if no stations are registered. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing the NNumeric keys while calling a preset station. • When you press NNumeric keys during normal frequency tuning, a frequency is entered. Set the tuner to the preset tuning mode using PTUNING / prior to the operation. ■ Clearing preset stations Use to clear the preset FM stations. 1 DFM 2 DiPod GENTER G / 3 IOPTION IRETURN KVOLUME +/– Press IOPTION. The option menu (page 28) appears on the front panel display. Press G / to select “Clear Preset” and then press GENTER. A preset station is displayed. C01:FM 92.50MHz PMEMORY PTUNING RINFO 26 En Note The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station broadcasts the PS data. 2 Press RINFO repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Press DFM to select the FM station as the input source. NNumeric keys PPRESET Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (page 25). / Preset station / y • To cancel the clearing operation, press IRETURN. PS Decoder PTY RT CT Frequency • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program. • Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data System program. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Note In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). INTRODUCTION Program type Descriptions News Current Affairs Current Affairs Information Information Sport Sport Education Education Drama Drama Cultures Cultures Science Science Varied Speech Varied Speech Pop Music Pop Music Rock Music Rock Music Easy Listening Easy Listening Music Light Classics Light Classical Music Serious Classic Serious Classical Music Other Music Other Music PREPARATION News Playback Playback mode Playing back iPod™ Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ By using the Yamaha wireless transmitter for iPod (PDX50TX/PDX-50BC), you can use the iPod/iPhone as a remote control and enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone on this unit. About PDX-50TX/PDX-50BC, refer to “Safety and Accessory Information” (separate booklet). See also: “iPod Interlock” (page 36) Connect your iPod/iPhone and PDX-50TX, and then start playback. y • This unit supports the following iPod/iPhone models. – iPod 5th generation – iPod classic – iPod touch – iPod nano – iPhone – iPhone 3G Notes VOLUME Useful features INTELLIBEAM MIC MENU y • When you start playback of your iPod/iPhone, this unit automatically operates as follows. – When this unit is on, this unit selects “iPod” as the input source. – When this unit is in the standby mode, this unit turns on and selects “iPod” as the input source. • You can also select the input source with DiPod. • To adjust the volume level, use the volume control on the iPod/iPhone or KVOLUME +/– on this unit. • This unit automatically turns to the standby mode in the following conditions. – The iPod/iPhone is disconnected from PDX-50TX. – The iPod/iPhone is turned into sleep mode. SETTINGS • Be sure to use the product only in the country in where it was purchased. • This unit does not support iPod (4th generation or before), iPod without Dock connector, iPod photo and iPod mini. • You cannot run the AUTO SETUP while playing back the iPod/ iPhone by using PDX-50TX. To run the AUTO SETUP, stop playback and then disconnect the iPod/iPhone from PDX-50TX. INPUT PLAYBACK FEATURES FM tuning APPENDIX 27 En Useful features TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D This function adjusts the volume level of the TV so that it will not increase suddenly when whenever the contents being broadcast change (due to commercials, etc.). OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV I INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT M PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP • To turn off the UniVolume function, press MUNIVOLUME again. • We recommend turning off the UniVolume function during playback of music. Using the HDMI™ control function CODE SET TUNING Press MUNIVOLUME. The UNIVOLUME indicator lights up on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc or DVD player) connected to this unit. 3 Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray disc or DVD player) as the input source of this unit to check the video input. Note <Note> • In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV may be effective. – “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “ON” on this unit (page 36). – The HDMI control function is enables on the TV. – If you changed the connection method or connected components, repeat steps 1-3. y TV MUTE UNIVOLUME Adjusting volume level automatically (UniVolume) Q R You can operate the following functions of this unit with the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI control function supported) is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. • Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with TV) • Adjusting the volume • Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or TV) Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. 1 Press QSLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator (page 7) flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. y • Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some functions may not be available. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your TV. • If you connect this unit and Blu-ray disc player or DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control those devices with the HDMI control function. For details, refer to the manual supplied with each device. • We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray disc/DVD player, etc.) from the same manufacturer. • The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray disc player. 2 To use this function, you need to set HDMI control function and register the HDMI components to the TV. Setting the HDMI control function 1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit with HDMI. 2 Enable the HDMI control function on each device. For this unit, set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” (page 36). For external devices, refer to the manual supplied with each device. DInput selector keys GENTER G G / / IOPTION MUNIVOLUME QSLEEP RINFO 3 28 En Sleep 90 min. Sleep 60 min. Sleep 30 min. Sleep Off Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. • If this unit is set to the standby mode, the sleep timer setting is canceled. Configuring settings for each input source (Option menu) You can configure various settings for each input source (TV, AUX1/2, HDMI1-4, iPod, and FM). Available menu items vary depending on the selected input source. 1 Press DInput selector keys to select the desired input source. 2 Press IOPTION. The first item of the option menu for the selected input source appears on the front panel display. Turn off the TV and then turn on it again. Registering HDMI components to TV 1 120 min. y y • For some HDMI components, you only need to set the HDMI control function. Registering HDMI components to TV is not required in this case. Sleep Select this unit as the input source of the TV. 1.Volume Trim Press G / to select the desired menu item and then press GENTER. 4 Press G / to select the desired setting and then press GENTER. 5 To exit from the menu, press IOPTION. Displaying the input signal information Use to display information of the sampling frequency, video signal type, and resolution for each input source on the front panel display. 1 The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input source Audio Sampling Menu items Volume Trim Decoder Mode TV Volume Trim Decoder Mode AUX1~2 Volume Trim Decoder Mode FM Volume Trim FM Mode iPod Volume Trim 2 Press RINFO repeatedly to change items to be displayed. Sampling frequency (Audio Sampling) The sampling frequency per second in analog- to-digital conversion. Auto Preset Clear Preset Details of the menu items are as follows. The configuration will be reflected to the input source currently selected. y Video signal (Video Signal In) Signal type and resolution of video input signal. Playback Playback mode FM tuning Playing back iPod™ • The initial settings are marked with “*”. Volume Trim (Volume trim) Use to reduce any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. Adjustable range: –6.0dB to +6.0dB (in 0.5 dB steps) Initial setting: 0.0dB PLAYBACK FEATURES HDMI1~4 Select an input source (TV, AUX1/2, and HDMI1-4) and then press RINFO. PREPARATION ■ Option menu items INTRODUCTION 3 Useful features Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) Use to select DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Choices: Auto*, DTS • Select Auto to automatically select audio input signals. • Select DTS to selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. SETTINGS FM Mode (FM receiving mode) Use to set the FM broadcasting receiving mode. Choices: Stereo*, Mono • Select Stereo to receive in stereo mode by priority. • Select Mono to receive in monaural mode. Auto Preset (Automatic preset) Use to automatically detect FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations (page 25). Clear Preset (Clear preset station) Use to clear the preset FM stations (page 26). APPENDIX 29 En SETTINGS TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Customizing this unit (SET MENU) D SET MENU items CINEMA DSP SURROUND STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU I OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV You can manually configure various settings for this unit in “SET MENU”. OFF Menu MEMORY Sub menu Features Page LOAD Loads the beam and sound settings saved in the memory. 19 SAVE Saves the current beam and sound settings to the memory. 19 BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ Optimizes the beam and sound settings automatically. 16 BEAM OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the beam settings automatically. 16 SOUND OPTIMZ ONLY Optimizes the sound settings automatically. 16 SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 31 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 32 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front right and left channels. 32 TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or lowfrequency sound. 33 SUBWOOFER SET Configures the subwoofer settings. 33 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 33 DRC:Dynamic Range Control Adjusts the dynamic range. 34 BASS EXTENSION Selects the bass sound extension. 34 MUSIC ENHANCER Selects the compressed audio enhancer. 34 CHANNEL LEVEL Adjusts the volume of each channel. 34 SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG Configures the sound beam output settings. 34 SOUND OUT Configures the audio signal output settings. 34 INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 35 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 35 HDMI SETUP Configures the HDMI settings. 36 WIRELESS SETUP Configures the wireless settings. 36 F. DISPLAY SETUP Configures the front panel display settings. 36 OSD SETUP Configures the OSD settings. 37 LANGUAGE SETUP Changes the language used in the OSD. 37 UNIT SETUP Changes the display unit of measurement. 37 TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE AUTO SETUP SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET MANUAL SETUP TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP SOUND SET MENU SOUND OUT MENU INPUT MENU DISPLAY MENU DInput selector keys GENTER G / G / G ISETUP 30 En / / 1 1 Press ISETUP. SET MENU In “SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3”, configure “INSTALLED POSITION”. Select the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL* (parallel to wall), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (angle to wall or corner) FLAT TO WALL ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER PREPARATION p p . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;SOUND SET MENU ;SOUND OUT MENU ;INPUT MENU ;DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 INTRODUCTION Basic SET MENU operation Press G / to select the desired menu and then press GENTER. Note • If you change this setting, “BEAM MODE” setting changes automatically (page 23). C)MANUAL SETUP .1)SETTING PARAMETERS 2)BEAM ADJUSTMENT 3)IMAGE LOCATION 2 PLAYBACK FEATURES p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Configure “INSTALLED HEIGHT”. Specify the installed height of this unit. Control range: 0.0 m to 3.0 m (0.0 ft to 10.0 ft) Initial setting: 1.0 m (3.5 ft) y • To return to the previous menu, press IRETURN. 3 Press G / / / and GENTER to configure each parameter. y 0.0 to 3.0 m (0.0 ft to 10.0 ft) • The initial settings are marked with “*”. Note • The menu screen disappears if one of the DInput selector keys is pressed while the SET MENU is being configured. 4 To exit from the menu, press ISETUP. y • Press G 3 MANUAL SETUP Use this menu to manually adjust the parameters related to the sound beam output. To fine-adjust parameters configured by AUTO SETUP, use “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” and “IMAGE LOCATION”. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SETTING PARAMETERS Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. y • If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically adjusted. In “SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3”, configure the listening room settings. Specify the length and width of the listening room. Control range: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Customizing this unit (SET MENU) When this unit is installed parallel to wall, specify the width of the listening room and the distance between this unit and rear wall. System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) When this unit is installed at the corner of the room, specify the width of length of the listening room. Controlling external components Using an external amplifier SETTINGS ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) to proceed to the next page. Note 4 In “SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3”, configure the distance settings. Specify the distance between the listening position and this unit. When this unit is installed parallel to wall, you also need to specify the distance between the listening position and left wall. APPENDIX • If you make adjustments in “SETTING PARAMETERS”, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. 31 En Control range (from this unit): 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Control range (from left wall): 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE MUSIC FLAT TO WALL ENTER TAINMENT 1.8 to 9.0 m (6.0 to 30.0 ft) STEREO • Configure this setting only when you have adjusted “HORIZONTAL ANGLE”. Control range: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME 0.6 to 11.4 m (2.0 to 38.0 ft) G ENTER TOP MENU Configure “BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH”. Adjust the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. Note OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND 3 INPUT MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP The length of each arrow indicates the beam travel length. ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM ADJUSTMENT Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. Notes • The “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” parameters are automatically adjusted (except “Center” in “FOCAL LENGTH”) if you run the AUTO SETUP (page 15) or if you configure “SETTING PARAMETERS” (page 31). • Depending on the beam mode settings (page 23), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. • If you change “BEAM ADJUSTMENT” settings while playing back your iPod/iPhone connected to PDX-50TX, the subwoofer connected to SWK-W10 outputs the iPod/iPhone audio. We recommend stopping the iPod/iPhone playback during the beam adjustment. 1 Configure “HORIZONTAL ANGLE”. Adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel using test tones. Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. Control range: L90° to R90° (–) (+) (+) (–) 4 Configure “FOCAL LENGTH”. Adjust the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. Adjust toward (minus) to move the focus outward (widen the sweet spot) and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position (narrow the sweet spot). Focal point Focal length Sweet spot Control range: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) y • We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m or – 1.5 ft) for “Center”. • The width of the sweet spot becomes slightly wider than the width of this unit if you run the AUTO SETUP (page 15) or if you configure “SETTING PARAMETERS” (page 31). Example Front left channel y • Press G 2 （−） to switch the channels. Configure “VERTICAL ANGLE”. Adjust the vertical angle of sound beams for each channel using test tones. Adjust toward – (minus) to move the angle downward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the angle upward. Control range: –45° to +45° (+) 0° (–) G 32 En Center channel （＋） ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → IMAGE LOCATION Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural. y • To adjust the volume of each channel, see “CHANNEL LEVEL” (page 34) Choices: OFF*, ON • Select “ON” to configure the sound direction. Adjust the image location for the front left channel (LEFT). The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center Without adjustment Adjust the image location for the front right channel (RIGHT). The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center Without adjustment With the front right channel adjusted CROSS OVER (Crossover) When “BASS OUT” is set to “SUBWOOFER”, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz* LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Adjust the output level of the low-frequency effect (LFE) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 dB to 0 dB* PLAYBACK FEATURES 2 With the front left channel adjusted PREPARATION 1 • Select SUBWOOFER if you connect a subwoofer with a subwoofer cable. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT OR AUTO if you do not use a subwoofer or connect a subwoofer by wireless. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front right and left channels when you do not use a subwoofer. They are directed to the subwoofer automatically when a wireless connection between a subwoofer and this unit is established properly. If the wireless connection is cut off, they are directed to the front channels automatically. INTRODUCTION You can adjust this parameter only when “5Beam Plus2”, “5 Beam” or “3 Beam” is selected in “BEAM MODE” (page 23). DISTANCE (Distance) Adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 m to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → AUDIO DELAY Use to adjust delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. SOUND SET MENU ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → SUBWOOFER SET Use to configure the subwoofer settings. System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier Controlling external components HDMI Manually adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the HDMI IN jacks. This setting is effective only when “AUTO LIP SYNC” is set to “OFF” Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec Initial setting: 30msec APPENDIX BASS OUT (Bass out) Select where to output low-frequency effect (LFE) and low-frequency (bass) signals. Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT OR AUTO* TV Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the TV jacks. Control range: 0 msec* to 400 msec Customizing this unit (SET MENU) SETTINGS TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB AUTO LIP SYNC (Automatic lipsync) Select whether to automatically adjust the audio output delay when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Choices: ON*, OFF • Select ON if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit supports the automatic lipsync. The audio output delay is automatically adjusted. • Select OFF if the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit does not support the automatic lipsync or you want to disable the automatic lipsync. You can manually adjust the audio output delay in “HDMI”. AUX1/2 Adjust the audio output delay applied to signals input from the AUX1/2 jacks. Control range: 0 msec to 400 msec Initial setting: 30msec 33 En ■ DRC:Dynamic Range Control (Dynamic range control) TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE MUSIC ENTER TAINMENT SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → DRC:Dynamic Range Control Use to adjust the dynamic range compression. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. OFF CINEMA DSP STEREO TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY SLEEP Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control) Select whether to automatically adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. When the volume level is low: Narrow the dynamic range. Loud sound is played back softer, and soft sound which is hard to be listened to is played back louder. When the volume level is high: Widen the dynamic range. From soft sound to loud sound, source sound is played back without adjusting volume. On Off Input level Volume : low Output level G ENTER Output level SURROUND On Off Input level Volume : high Choices: On*, Off • Select On to enable the adaptive dynamic range control. • Select Off to disable the adaptive dynamic range control. y • “Dolby/DTS DRC” is automatically set to “Max” when “Off” is selected. • This setting is automatically set to “Off” when the UniVolume function is turned on while this setting is automatically set to “On” when the UniVolume function is turned off. Dolby/DTS DRC (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Select the amount of dynamic range applied when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals Choices: Max* (Maximum), Standard, Min/Auto (Minimum/Auto) • Select Max to output sound without adjusting the • dynamic range of the input signals. • Select Standard to set the standard dynamic range • recommended for regular home use. • Select Min/Auto to set the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals (Min) or adjust the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information (Auto). y • “Adaptive DRC” is automatically set to “Off” when the settings other than “Max” is selected. ■ BASS EXTENSION (Bass extension) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → BASS EXTENSION Use to turn on or off the bass sound extension. When this function is enabled, the BASS EXT indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 7). Choices: OFF, MID*, DEEP • Select OFF to output bass sounds without change. • Select MID to output moderately-enhanced bass sounds. • Select DEEP to output deep bass sounds. ■ MUSIC ENHANCER (Music Enhancer) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → MUSIC ENHANCER Use to turn on or off the compressed audio enhancer. When this function is enabled, the ENHANCER indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 7). AUX1/2 Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. Choices: ON, OFF* • Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. • Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer for playback of AUX1/2 input sources. iPod Select whether to apply the compressed audio enhancer to iPod/iPhone playback. Choices: ON*, OFF • Select ON to enable the compressed audio enhancer for iPod/iPhone playback. • Select OFF to disable the compressed audio enhancer for iPod/iPhone playback. ■ CHANNEL LEVEL (Channel level) SET MENU → SOUND SET MENU → CHANNEL LEVEL Use to adjust the volume of each channel with test tones. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Note • Adjustable channels vary depending on the “CHANNEL OUT” setting. • “Surround Back R” and “Surround Back L” are not adjustable when “SOUND OUT” is set to “SPEAKER”. SOUND OUT MENU ■ SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG (Sound beam output configuration) SET MENU → SOUND OUT MENU → SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG Use to configure the number of output channels or audio output method. For details, see “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23). ■ SOUND OUT (Sound output) G / G 34 En SET MENU → SOUND OUT MENU → SOUND OUT Use to configure the audio signal output settings. • The parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level” are settings for the PRE OUT jacks when they are selected as audio output jacks. BASS OUT (Bass sound output redirection) Use to redirect the output of bass sounds. The settings under “BASS OUT” are for the PRE OUT jacks. Choices: SUBWOOFER, FRONT* • Select SUBWOOFER to output bass sounds from the subwoofer. • Select FRONT to output bass sounds from the external front right and left speakers. Center SP Size (Center speaker size for PRE OUT) Select the size of external center speakers. Choices: None, Small* • Select None if no center speaker is used. Center channel signals are mixed into the front right and left speakers. • Select Small if a center speaker is used. Low-frequency parts of center channel signals are output from the subwoofer (or mixed into the front right and left channel signals if subwoofer is not available). PRE OUT Volume (PRE OUT volume) Adjust the output level of the PRE OUT jacks. Control range: –30.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –18.0 dB AUDIO2 Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (AUX 1) jacks are assigned. Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV Note • The input already selected in “AUDIO1” is not displayed. To set the input selected in “AUDIO1”, change “AUDIO1” parameter, and then reconfigure. OPTICAL1 Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (TV) jack is assigned. Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 Note • The input already selected in “OPTICAL2” or “COAX” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. OPTICAL2 Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack is assigned. Choices: AUX1*, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV Note • The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “COAX” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. COAX Select the key to which the DIGITAL IN (AUX 2) jack is assigned. Choices: AUX2*, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, TV, AUX1 ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) • The input already selected in “OPTICAL1” or “OPTICAL2” is not displayed. To set the input selected in one of these parameters, change the corresponding parameter, and then reconfigure. SET MENU → INPUT MENU → INPUT RENAME Use to change the name of the input source displayed when the input source is selected. Select a name from templates, or enter an original name. Using an external amplifier Controlling external components Selecting a name from templates 1 Press G / be renamed. to select the input source to APPENDIX SET MENU → INPUT MENU → INPUT ASSIGNMENT Use to change the key assignments of input jacks on this unit. The parenthetic references displayed in the menu screen indicate the initial settings. See also: “AUDIO SELECT” (page 36) System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Note ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) INPUT MENU Customizing this unit (SET MENU) y • Press G SETTINGS LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT) Adjust the low-frequency effect output level of the PRE OUT jacks. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 dB to + 0 dB* • The input already selected in “AUDIO2” is not displayed. To set the input selected in “AUDIO2”, change “AUDIO2” parameter, and then reconfigure. PLAYBACK FEATURES Front SP Size (Front speaker size for PRE OUT) Select the size of external front speakers. Choices: Small, Large* • Select Small if the diameter of the front speaker’s woofer is smaller than 16 cm. Low-frequency parts of front right and left channel signals are output from the subwoofer. Note PREPARATION y AUDIO1 Select the key to which the AUDIO IN (TV) jacks are assigned. Choices: TV*, AUX1, AUX2, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 INTRODUCTION SOUND OUT (Sound output redirection) Use to redirect the output of audio signals. Audio output of all the channels switches simultaneously. Choices: SPEAKER*, PRE OUT • Select SPEAKER to output sounds from this unit. • Select PRE OUT to output audio signals from the PRE OUT jacks of this unit. You also need to configure the parameters from “BASS OUT” to “LFE Level” described below. to proceed to the next page. 35 En TV C AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 iPod FM HDMI 4 MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC Press G / to select a input source name. Choices: TV, Blu-ray, DVD, HDDVD, STB, Satelite, Game 3 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN. Entering an original name OFF CINEMA DSP SURROUND 2 1 Press G / be renamed. 2 Press GENTER. “ ” appears above the new name display to indicate the position to be entered. 3 Press G / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press G character. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit other characters. 6 To complete the setting, press GENTER. 7 To exit from the menu, press IRETURN. STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU MENU OPTION SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV I TV MUTE INPUT UNIVOLUME MUTE to select the input source to SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT CODE SET TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY / to select the desired SLEEP y • A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, and symbols (!, ?, <, >, etc.) are available for input. ■ HDMI SETUP (HDMI setup) SET MENU → INPUT MENU → HDMI SETUP Use to configure the settings related to HDMI signals and HDMI control function. G G / / IRETURN ISETUP 36 En SET MENU → INPUT MENU → WIRELESS SETUP Use to configure the wireless connection between this unit and PDX-50TX or SWK-W10. Wireless Function (Wireless function) Select whether or not to use the wireless function of this unit. Choices: No, Yes* • Select No to disable the wireless function of this unit. • Select Yes to enable the wireless function of this unit. iPod Interlock (iPod interlock) Select whether or not to use the iPod/iPhone interlock function. When the iPod/iPhone interlock function is on, this unit automatically turns on if you turn on the iPod/ iPhone when this unit is in the standby mode. In addition, this unit is set to the standby mode if the iPod/iPhone is set to the standby mode. Choices: OFF, ON* • Select OFF to disable the iPod/iPhone interlock function. The standby consumption power of this unit decreases. • Select ON to enable the iPod/iPhone interlock function. Group ID (Group ID) The group ID is used for wirelessly connecting Yamaha products that support AirWired. To establish a connection among this unit, PDX-50TX and SWK-W10, set the group ID of these products to the same group. Choices: A1*, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3 y y ■ F.DISPLAY SETUP (Front panel display setup) Choices: (Model name of this unit)*, OTHER • Select this unit to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. • Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on the component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. GENTER ■ WIRELESS SETUP (Wireless setup) SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio) Use to select a component to play back HDMI audio signals. This setting is effective only when “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF”. • HDMI video signals input to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are always output from the HDMI OUT jack. CPower • Select OFF to turn off the HDMI control function. The standby consumption power of this unit decreases. • Select ON to turn off the HDMI control function. AUDIO SELECT (Audio select) Select whether or not to output HDMI audio signals input to each HDMI IN jacks. This function is useful when you want to enjoy another audio input source while watching HDMI video sources. For example, if you set “HDMI1” of “AUDIO SELECT” to “OFF” and “OPTICAL1” of “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” to “HDMI1” (page 35), you can enjoy the audio source input to the DIGITAL IN (AUX 1) jack while watching the HDMI video source input to HDMI IN 1 jack. Choices: OFF, ON* HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI controlcompatible TV via HDMI. For details, see “Using the HDMI control function” (page 28). Choices: OFF*, ON • PDX-50TX supports “1” (A1), “2” (A2), and “3” (A3) only. DISPLAY MENU SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → F.DISPLAY SETUP Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit. Choices: –2, –1, OFF* AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you do not operate this unit. The front panel display automatically dims or turns off according to this setting if no operation is performed for a specified period of time. Choices: DISPLAY OFF, –3 to –1, OFF* • Select OFF for the same brightness as “STANDARD DIMMER”. • Select –3 to –1 to get dimmer (based on “STANDARD DIMMER”). • Select DISPLAY OFF to turn off the front panel display. SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → OSD SETUP Use to adjust the display position and select the background color of the OSD. SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → LANGUAGE SETUP Use to select the language used in the OSD. OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: ±0 Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) Initial setting: ENGLISH (English) OSD BACK COLOR (OSD background color) Use to select the background color of the OSD. Choices: Blue*, Gray, Black, Purple, Red SET MENU → DISPLAY MENU → UNIT SETUP Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS*, FEET • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. PREPARATION ■ LANGUAGE SETUP (Language setup) INTRODUCTION ■ OSD SETUP (OSD setup) ■ UNIT SETUP (Unit setup) Note • If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. PLAYBACK FEATURES System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. 1 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the standby mode. 5 Press G / parameter. 2 While holding down INPUT on the front panel, press CPower p key on the remote control. Keep holding down INPUT until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel display. 6 Press CPower p key to set this unit to the standby mode. The new setting will be reflected when you turn on this unit next time. to select the desired y • The initial settings are marked with “*”. TURN ON VOLUME (Volume level at power-on) Set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Control range: OFF*, 01 to 99, MAX (Maximum) INPUT INPUT VOLUME MAX VOLUME SET (Maximum volume setting) Set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. Control range: 01 to 99, MAX* (Maximum) INTELLIBEAM MIC Press ISETUP. 4 Press G / to select the desired menu and then press GENTER. Example (when “DEMO MODE” is selected) VOL DEMOXMODE PANEL INP.KEY (Front panel input key) Select whether or not to enable the INPUT key on front panel key. To disable the operations, select “P.INPUT: OFF”. Choices: P.INPUT: ON*, P.INPUT: OFF F.PANEL KEY (Front panel key) Select whether or not to enable front panel key operations (except ADVANCED SETUP operations). To disable the operations, select “F.PANEL: OFF”. Choices: F.PANEL: ON*, F.PANEL: OFF System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier SETTINGS 3 Customizing this unit (SET MENU) Controlling external components y • To return to the previous screen, press IRETURN. APPENDIX 37 En A B TV AV TV AUX 1 AUX 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 iPod FM MOVIE ENTER TAINMENT MUSIC D OFF E CINEMA DSP SURROUND F STEREO G ENTER TOP MENU SETUP RETURN TV VOL CH VOLUME TV TV MUTE UNIVOLUME H I J MENU OPTION INPUT L MUTE R.INPUT POWER (Power-on by remote control input keys) Select whether or not to automatically turn on this unit when you select an input source on the remote control. To enable the function, select “R.INPUT PW: ON”. Choices: R.INPUT PW: OFF*, R.INPUT PW: ON AC ON STANDBY (Standby after AC on) Set this unit to the standby mode when the AC power is recovered after the power to this unit was lost temporally (disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet, power outage, etc.). To enable the function, select “AC STANDBY: ON”. Choices: AC STANDBY: OFF*, AC STANDBY: ON MEMORY PROTECT (Memory protect) Protect the settings you have saved in the system memory. To protect the settings, select “PROTECT: ON”. Choices: PROTECT: OFF*, PROTECT: ON SUR. DECODE INTELLIBEAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 ENT y • After you checked the sound beam output, set this setting to “BEAM DEMO: OFF”. • If you set “SOUND OUT” to “PRE OUT”, “DEMO MODE” does not function. FACTORY PRESET (Factory preset) Reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. Choices: CANCEL*, RESET N CODE SET DEMO MODE (Demo mode) Test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. To set this unit to the demo mode, select “BEAM DEMO: ON”. Choices: BEAM DEMO: OFF*, BEAM DEMO: ON • To move the beam horizontally, turn off this unit and then turn on it again (“DEMO” appears on the front panel display). Playback an input source and then press EOFF. • To stop the beam movement, press EOFF again. • To adjust the beam angle manually, press FSURROUND or FSTEREO when the beam is not moving. O P TUNING PRESET INFO MEMORY Using an external amplifier SLEEP You can connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Set “SOUND OUT” (page 34) to “PRE OUT” and then configure “PRE OUT BASS Management” parameters. See also: “Changing the audio output method for surround playback” (page 23) 1 2 3 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 4 PRE OUT 5 ATransmission indicator 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Output front right and left channel signals. BAV BTV 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Output surround right and left channel signals. DInput selector keys EOFF 3 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks Output surround back right and left channel signals. FSTEREO FSURROUND GCursor ( / / ) keys / 4 CENTER PRE OUT jack Outputs center channel signals. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. GENTER HMENU HTOP MENU Note IRETURN • The following functions are disabled when an external amplifier is used. – AUTO SETUP (page 15) – CINEMA DSP programs (page 22) – UniVolume (page 28) – MUSIC ENHANCER (page 34) – BASS EXTENSION (page 34) – Adaptive DRC (page 34) ISETUP JCH / LTV operation keys NNumeric keys OCODE SET PExternal component operation keys 38 En INTRODUCTION Controlling external components Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. 1 While holding down OCODE SET, press DInput selector key to which the remote control code is assigned. ATransmission indicator flashes twice. B TV p Turns on the power of your TV or set it to the standby mode. 2 Release OCODE SET. 3 Press NNumeric keys to enter the remote control code (page 45) for your external component. Each time you press you press the key, ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the 5digit remote control code is entered properly, ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately 2 seconds. B AV p Turns on the power of the selected component or set it to the standby mode. G Cursor ( / / / Use to select menu items. ) keys, ENTER H TOP MENU Displays the top menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD. y • To clear remote control code set to a selected input source, enter “00010”. H MENU Displays the menu of a Blu-ray disc or DVD. Note I RETURN Returns to the previous menu screen. • If any key other than NNumeric keys is pressed, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled. J CH / Switches between available channels for your external component. 4 L TV operation keys TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. TV INPUT Switched the input source for your TV. N Numeric keys Use to enter numeric digits or specify a channel number. Perform a test operation using the remote control of this unit. If the external component functions correctly, the remote control code setup is successful. If it does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Check the remote control code for your external component (page 45) and try again. Note • If no operation is performed after step 1 or in the middle of step 2 within 30 seconds, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the setting mode is canceled. ■ Resetting all remote control codes 1 P External component operation keys Use to control playback of your external component. 2 Release OCODE SET. 3 Press NNumeric keys to enter “99999”. Each time you press the NNumeric keys, ATransmission indicator flashes once. Once the remote control code is entered properly, ATransmission indicator lights up for approximately 2 seconds and then the initialization is completed. • The BTVp and LTV operation keys always work regardless of the selected input source. Notes System configurations (ADVANCED SETUP) Using an external amplifier Controlling external components Note • If one of the other keys is pressed, ATransmission indicator flashes 5 times and the initialization is canceled. APPENDIX • Depending on external components, some or all operations may not work. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. • If you operate your TV with the remote control of this unit when the HDMI control function is activated, this unit or external component connected to this unit with HDMI works improperly in some cases. While holding down OCODE SET, press ISETUP. ATransmission indicator flashes twice. Customizing this unit (SET MENU) SETTINGS O CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 39). y PLAYBACK FEATURES ■ Setting remote control codes PREPARATION You can control external components using the following keys on the remote control of this unit by setting the appropriate remote control codes (page 45). Before operating the control keys, press one of the DInput selector keys to select an external component to be controlled. 39 En APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. 12 This unit fails to turn on when CPower (p) key is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. 12 This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. 21 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or DInput selector keys. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 21 The sound is muted. Press KMUTE or KVOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 21 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect the HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 12 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to this unit in “SET MENU”. 36 The output level of the channel is muted. Raise the output level of the channel. 34 The beam setting is inappropriate. Adjust the beam setting. 32 You play back the source in the stereo mode. Start surround playback. 22 Some audio output methods do not output sound beams for certain channels. Select another beam mode. 23 “BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT OR AUTO” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 The group IDs of this unit and SWK-W10 are not set to the same value. Check whether the group IDs of this unit and SWKW10 are set to the same value. 36 “Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”. 36 Distorted or too little bass sound. “CROSS OVER” is set incorrectly in “SUBWOOFER SET”. Set “CROSS OVER” correctly in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 Surround sound effects are insubstantial. The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — No sound. No sound or too small sound from a specific channel No sound from the subwoofer. The source does not contain low bass signals. No sound from the subwoofer connected by wireless. 40 En Digital audio signals cannot be played back. (q DIGITAL indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) Remedy See page The playback component is connected to this unit with an analog connection. Connect them with an HDMI connection or a digital connection. 12 The external component is not set to output digital audio signals. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your component and check the setting. — Bit streaming is disabled on the external component. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your component and check the setting. — The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 21 Set “BASS OUT” to “SUBWOOFER” in “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for “SUBWOOFER SET”. 33 The cable is not connected to the TV or this unit properly. Connect the cable properly. 12 The HDMI control function does not work properly. “HDMI CONTROL” is set to “OFF” in “SET MENU”. Set “HDMI CONTROL” to “ON” in “SET MENU”. 36 The HDMI control function is disabled on your TV. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your TV and check the setting. — The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The automatic lipsync is not effective even “AUTO LIP SYNC” is set to “ON”. The TV does not support the automatic lipsync. Set “AUTO LIP SYNC” to “OFF” and then manually adjust the audio output delay. 33 “Not Available” appears on the front panel display after key operation. The key is unable to function in the current condition. PLAYBACK FEATURES On-screen display does not appear. PREPARATION There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. Cause INTRODUCTION Problem — ■ FM tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 14 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 25 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 25 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 25 SETTINGS ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 14 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 14 APPENDIX 41 En Problem Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. Cause Remedy See page The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press the desired DInput selector key to select the external component you want to operate. 39 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes”. 39 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — ■ iPod Problem No sound. Cause Remedy See page PDX-50TX is connected to another device. Select the same group ID as selected on this unit. — PDX-50TX and this unit are not connected since they are set to different groups. Set both PDX-50TX and this unit to the same group. 36 “Wireless Function” is set to “No”. Set “Wireless Function” to “Yes”. 36 Distance is too far. Move PDX-50TX closer to this unit. — There is a device (microwave oven, wireless LAN, etc.) outputting signals in 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move this unit away from the device. If the device is IEEE802.11n-compliant, change the channel setting of the device so as not to affect the unit. — The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX firmly. Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly. — The firmware of the iPod or iPhone is not updated. Download the latest iTunes software to update the firmware of the iPod or iPhone. — The signal from PDX-50TX is blocked by your body or metallic objects, etc. Change the way of holding, orientation, or position of PDX-50TX to avoid the object blocking the signal. — The battery of iPod or iPhone is low. Charge the iPod or iPhone. — The iPod or iPhone is in the process of connecting with this unit. Please wait for a while. — The protection circuitry has been activated by excessive volume. Turn down the volume. 21 The iPod or iPhone being used is not supported by this unit. Use an iPod or iPhone supported by this unit. 27 The iPod or iPhone is not connected to PDX-50TX firmly. Connect the iPod or iPhone firmly. — Suddenly this unit produces sounds even though an iPod or iPhone is not connected. This unit is connected to another device. Change the group ID of this unit. 36 The iPod/iPhone interlock function does not work. “iPod Interlock” is set to “OFF”. Set “iPod Interlock” to “ON”. 36 Controlling volume on the iPod or iPhone does not work. 42 En ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX ■ Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortionfree 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ DTS Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed 43 En APPENDIX Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. SETTINGS ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ DTS 96/24 PLAYBACK FEATURES Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. PREPARATION ■ Dolby Digital INTRODUCTION Glossary for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Specifications AMP SECTION FM SECTION • Maximum Output Power Woofer...........................................................20 W/ch (4 Ω, 100 Hz, 10% THD) Small dia. speaker .............................................2 W/ch (4 Ω, 1 kHz, 10% THD) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .................................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz Wireless SPEAKER SECTION • Frequency ...................................................................................................2.4 GHz • Speaker type .................................................. 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic • Driver Small dia. speakers.............. 4 cm (1-1/2 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 40 Woofers ....................................................................... 11 cm (4-1/2 in) cone × 2 Tweeters (YSP-5100 only) ................................2.5 cm (1 in) balanced dome x 2 • Frequency response YSP-5100 ............................................... 70 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode) YSP-4100 ............................................... 80 Hz to 20 kHz (-10dB, Stereo mode) CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV, AUX 1 AUDIO IN............................................................... 2 pairs (Analog) TV, AUX 1 DIGITAL IN (FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz) ...............................................................................................2 (Optical digital) AUX 2 DIGITAL IN (FS=32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz) .............................................................................................. 1 (Coaxial digital) AUX 1 VIDEO IN......................................................................... 1 (Composite) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL AUX 2 VIDEO IN........................................................................ 1 (Component) HDMI IN............................................................................................................ 4 • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER .................................................................................................. 1 VIDEO OUT (composite input or menu screen) ......................... 1 (Composite) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea, and General models] ....................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................................... PAL HDMI OUT ....................................................................................................... 1 • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC ....................................................... 1 (Microphone input) RS-232C .................................................................................1 (System control) SYSTEM CONNECTOR .............................. 1 (for subwoofer power interlock) IR IN ......................................................................................1 (System control) IR-OUT ..................................................................................1 (System control) 44 En GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ....................................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Europe and Russia models] ...................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ............................................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] ......................................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [China and Asia models] ............................................ AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 55 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control OFF/Wireless Power OFF ...................................... 0.5 W or less HDMI Control ON/AirWired ON (factory preset).......................... 1.0 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) YSP-5100 Maximum dimension.............1200 x 212 x 90 mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in) With stands ........................1200 x 214 x 110.7mm (47-1/4 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in) YSP-4100 Maximum dimension.............1030 x 212 x 90 mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 3-1/2 in) With stands ........................1030 x 214 x 110.7mm (40-1/2 x 8-3/8 x 4-3/8 in) • Weight YSP-5100 .................................................................................11.0 kg (24.2 lbs) YSP-4100 .................................................................................10.0 kg (22.0 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard: • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. INTRODUCTION List of remote control codes TV DUMONT DURABRAND DUX D-VISION DWIN DYNAMIC DYNATECH DYNATRON DYNEX ECE ELBE 00201, 15401, 16301 16801, 17601, 18201 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 09201, 10101 14801 15401 15701, 16201 15701 00401 03501, 15001, 15701, 16201 ELBIT 14701 ELECS 14701 ELECTRATUNE 15401 ELECTRO TECH 14801 ELECTROBAND 00001 ELECTROHOME 15401, 16301, 17901, 19001 ELECTRONIKA 14701 ELEKTA 14801, 15701, 16201 ELEKTRA 18601 ELEKTRONIKA 14701 ELG 15701, 16201 ELIN 00401, 06901, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 ELITE 04101, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 ELTA 00101, 14801, 14901 EMERSON 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 04601, 05801, 07901, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16801, 17201, 17701, 17901, 18201, 18501, 19301 ENVISION 00301, 10601, 16301, 17901 EPSON 11001 ERRES 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 ESC 15701, 16201 ETHER 00101, 00301 ETRON 00101, 14801, 15701, 16201 EUROMAN 15701, 16201 EUROMANN 14701 EUROPA 15701, 16201 EUROPHON 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201 EXCEL 15701, 16201 EXQUISIT 15701, 16201 FAMILY LIFE 15701, 16201 FENNER 14801, 15901 FERGUSON 00401, 01001, 01701, 03201, 03801, 04201, 07101, 15701, 15801, 16201 FIDELIS 14801 FIDELITY 04601, 15701, 16201 FILSAI 14801 FINLANDIA 02901, 04401, 15801 FINLUX 00401, 01401, 01501, 04401, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15101, 15701, 16201 FIRST LINE 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 FIRSTAR 00101, 03101 FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301, 08501 FISHER 01401, 02001, 02901, 04701, 16101, 18901 FLINT 05701, 14701, 15701, 16201 FORMENTI 00401, 04101, 14701, 15701, 16201 ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 16701, 16801, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18201, 18601 CITY 14801 CLARION 02701 CLARIVOX 00401, 15701, 16201 CLATRONIC 03301, 04701, 14801, 15701, 16201 CLP CLASSIC 16301 COLORTYME 14701, 16301, 17901 COMPUTRON 14801 CONCERTO 16301, 17901 CONCORDE 14801 CONDOR 04101, 04701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 CONIC 14701, 15401 CONRAC 10301 CONRAD 15701, 16201 CONTEC 00101, 02701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 18901 CONTINENTAL EDISON 16001 CORONADO 15401 COSMEL 14801, 15701, 16201 CRAIG 02701, 14701 CROSLEY 00801, 14701 CROWN 00101, 00401, 02701, 04701, 05201, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201 CRYSTAL 14701 CTC 03301 CURTIS MATHES 00301, 00501, 00801, 00901, 01301, 01801, 02001, 02301, 05601, 08901, 11801, 12201, 14701, 15401, 16301, 16601, 16701, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18601, 18701 CXC 02701 DAEWOO 00101, 00301, 00401, 01201, 01601, 02001, 02401, 02601, 02701, 04901, 05601, 07901, 08201, 13101, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901 DAICHI 14801 DANSAI 00401, 15401, 15701, 16201 DAWA 14701, 15701, 16201 DAYTON 00101 DAYTRON 14801, 15401, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 17901 DE GRAAF 02901, 06901 DECCA 00401, 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201 DEITRON 15701, 15901, 16201 DENON 01801 DENVER 14801, 15701, 16201 DESMET 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 DIAMANT 15701, 16201 DIAMOND 14801 DIGATRON 00401 DIGILINE 15701, 16201 DIGISTAR 17001, 17501 DIGITOR 15701, 16201 DIK 15701, 16201 DIMENSIA 18401, 18701 DIXI 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 DORIC 16101 DTS 14801 DUAL 14701, 14801, 15001, 15301, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16101, 16201 PLAYBACK FEATURES 14801, 16201 16201 14701, 14801, 15401 00101 01201, 01601, 08401 01301, 02201, 05801, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15201, 18601 ADVENT 09601 ADYSON 14701, 15401 AEA 15701, 16201 AGB 06801 AIKO 01201, 14801, 15701, 16201 AIM 15701, 16201 AIWA 16901, 17101, 17701, 18301 AKAI 00101, 00301, 02901, 04601, 06801, 08901, 10501, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16701 AKIBA 15701, 16201 AKITO 15701, 16201 AKURA 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ALBA 00101, 00401, 04801, 08501, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ALFA 14701 ALLSTAR 14701, 15701, 16201 AMERICA ACTION 02701 AMPRO 09401 AMSTRAD 00101, 00401, 02501, 04801, 05101, 05301, 06801, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 ANAM 00101, 02701, 03401, 15701, 16201 ANAM NATIONAL 03401, 08301, 15701, 16201 ANGLO 14801 ANITECH 00101, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201 ANSONIC 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 AOC 00101, 00301, 00901, 01201, 01301, 01601, 02601, 02701, 05601, 14701, 15401, 16301, 16501, 17901 APEX DIGITAL 09301, 09701, 09901 AR SYSTEM 15701, 16201 ARC EN CIEL 16001 ARCAM 16001 ARDEM 15701, 16201 ARISTONA 14701, 15701, 16201 ART TECH 14701 ASA 01401 ASBERG 14701, 15701, 16201 ASORA 14801 ASTRA 14801, 15701, 16201 ATLANTIC 14701, 15701, 16201 ATORI 14801 ATORO 14801 AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 AUDIOTON 14801 AUDIOVOX 14701 AUTOVOX 15501, 16101 AWA 00101, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BAIRD 15801 BANG & OLUFSEN 07201 00101 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BAUR 00401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 BAYSONIC 02701 BEAUMARK 02601 BEC 14701 BECRESE 14701, 15401 BEKO 04701, 06201, 09001, 09101, 14701, 15701, 16201 BELCOR 16301 BELL & HOWELL 02001, 14701, 18401, 18601, 18701 BENCHMARK-BEAUMARK 14701, 14801, 15401 BEON 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 BESTAR 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 BESTAR-DAEWOO 15901 BIGSTON 14801 BLACK DIAMOND 16201 BLAUPUNKT 02801 BLUE SKY 08501, 11401, 14701, 15701, 16201 BONDSTEC 03301, 15501 BPL 15701, 16201 BRADFORD 02701 BRANDT 01701, 04201, 15801, 16001 BRENDSTAR 14801 BRINKMANN 15701, 16201 BRIONVEGA 14701, 15001, 15701, 16201 BRIORRYEGA 14701 BROCKWOOD 15401 BROKSONIC 03101, 05801, 15401, 16801 BROKWOOD 16301 BUSH 00101, 00101, 00401, 04801, 04901, 08501, 11401, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 BYDESIGN 14301, 14401, 14501, 14601 CAMPLE 15401 CANDLE 00301, 15401, 16301, 17801, 17901 CAPEHART 14701, 15401 CARAD 15701, 16201 CARENA 15701, 16201 CARNIVALE 00301 CARREFOUR 14701, 15701, 16201 CARVER 00801, 02401, 14701 CASCADE 00101, 15701, 16201 CASIO 15701, 16101, 16201 CATHAY 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 CCE 00401, 15701, 16201 CELEBRITY 00001 CELERA 09701 CENTURION 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201, 17901 CGE 03301, 14801, 16001 CGM 14801 CHANGHONG 09701 CHING TAI 00101, 01201 CHUN YUN 00001, 00101, 01201, 02701 CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601, 02701 CIE 14801 CIMLINE 00101, 14801 CINERAL 01201, 05601 CIRCUIT CITY 15401 CITIZEN 00301, 00901, 01201, 14701, 15401, 16301, PREPARATION ACCENT ACCUPHASE ACTION ACURA ADDISON ADMIRAL BASIC BASIC LINE 45 En FORTRESS FRABA FRIAC FRONTECH 01301, 15401 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 02201, 03301, 03701, 14801, 16101 FUJITSU 08701, 10401, 15401, 15701, 16201 FUJITSU GENERAL 15001 FUNAI 02501, 02701, 03701, 14801, 15401, 17201, 17701, 18201 FUTURE 15701, 16201 FUTURETECH 02701 GALAXI 15701, 16201 GALAXIS 15701, 16201 GALERIA 14801 GATEWAY 13301, 13401 GBC 14801, 15901 GE 00301, 00501, 00601, 01201, 02601, 02701, 05601, 07101, 11801, 12201, 12601, 15801, 16301, 16401, 16601, 17301, 17401, 17901, 18401, 18701, 19001, 19101 GEC 00401, 06801, 15701, 16101, 16201 GELOSO 00101, 14801, 15901 GEMSOUND 14801 GENERAL 14801 GENERAL ELECTRIC 15801 GENERAL TECHNIC 14801 GENEXXA 02201, 14701, 15701, 16201 GIBRALTER 00201, 00301, 16301 GITEM 14701 GM 14801 GMG 14801 GOLDHAND 14801 GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401, 01701, 02001, 02601, 05001, 14701, 14801, 15201, 15401, 15501, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17701, 17901, 18901 GOODMANS 00401, 04801, 04901, 08201, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201 GOREMJE 04701 GPM 14801 GRADIENTE 00701, 02401, 15701, 16201 GRADIN 14701, 14801 GRAETZ 02201, 04601, 15701, 16201 GRANADA 00401, 02901, 04301, 06801, 14701, 15701, 15801, 16201 GRANDIN 07701, 15701, 15901, 16201 GRENADIER 14801 GRUNDIG 00401, 02801, 06301, 07001, 07401, 15701, 16201 GRUNPY 02701 GTT 14801 HAIER 17601, 18801 HALLMARK 02601, 15401, 16301, 17901 HANKOOK 00301, 02601, 02701 HANSEATIC 00401, 04101, 04601, 05201, 07001, 14701, 14801, 15301, 15701, 16101, 16201 HANTAREX 06801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 HANTOR 15701, 16201 HARLEY DAVIDSON 15401 HARMAN/KARDON 00801 46 En HARRAD HARVARD HARWOOD HAUPPAUGE HAVERMY HCM 15401 02701, 15401 15701, 16201 15701, 16201 01301 00101, 05101, 14801, 15701, 16201 HEATHKIT 14701 HEDZON 15701, 16201 HELLO KITTY 05601 HEMMERMANN 16101 HIFIVOX 16001 HIGHLINE 15701, 16201 HILINE 14801 HINARI 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 HISAWA 05701 HISENSE 19201 HITACHI 00101, 00301, 01201, 01501, 01701, 01801, 02201, 02601, 03001, 04501, 06101, 06901, 07301, 11701, 12101, 14701, 15401, 15701, 15801, 16101, 16201, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18601, 18901 HORIZONT 14701 HORNYPHON 14701 HORNYPHONE 15701, 16201 HUA TUN 00101 HUANYU 04901, 15901 HYPER 14801, 15501 HYPSON 00401, 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 IBERIA 15701, 16201 ICE 03701, 04801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 ICT 15701, 16201 IMA 15401 IMPERIAL 03301, 04701, 05201, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 INDIANA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 INFINITY 00801, 14701 INGELEN 02201 INGERSOLL 14801 INNO HIT 06801, 14701, 14801, 15201, 15701, 16201 INNOHIT 14701, 14801, 15201 INNOVA 00401 INNOVATION 15701, 16201 INSIGNIA 16801, 17001, 17201, 17501, 17601, 18001, 18201, 19401, 19501 INTEQ 00201 INTERACTIVE 15701, 16201 INTERBUY 14801, 15701, 16201 INTERDISCOUNT 14701 INTERFUNK 00401, 02201, 03301, 04601, 06701, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 INTERNAL 15701, 15901, 16201 INTERVISION 00401, 03701, 05001, 14901, 15701, 16201 IRRADIO 14701, 14801, 15101, 15201, 15501, 15701, 16201 IST 14701 ISUKAI 14701, 15701, 16201 ITL 14801 ITS 04801, 14801, 15701, 16201 ITT 02201, 04601, 06901, 16101 ITT NOKIA 16101 ITV 15701, 15901, 16201 JBL 00801, 14701 JC PENNEY 16301, 16401, 16501, 16601, 16701, 17301, 17401, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18501, 18701, 18901, 19001, 19101, JCB 00001 JEAN 00101, 00601, 01201, 02101, 03101 JENSEN 09601, 16301, 17901, 19501 JETPOINT 14701 JINLIPU 14801 JMB 15701, 15901, 16201 JULIBEE 16201 JUMBOTRONIC 14701 JVC 00701, 04801, 05801, 08401, 08701, 14701, 18901 KAISER 14701 KAISUI 00101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 KAPSCH 02201 KARCHER 07701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 KATHREIN 07001, 15701, 16201 KAWASHO 16301, 17901 KEC 02701 KENDO 00401, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 KENNEDY 15001 KENWOOD 00301, 15401, 16301, 17901 KIOTA 14801 KITION 16201 KITON 15701 KLH 15401 KNEISSEL 03501, 05401, 15301, 15701, 15901, 16201 KOBIC 14801 KOLIN 00701, 01601, 02701 KOLSTER 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 KONICHI 14801 KONKA 15701, 16201, 18001, 19401 KORPEL 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 KOSMOS 15701, 16201 KOYODA 00101 KTV 00301, 02701, 15401 KUASHO 14701, 15401 KUBA 16101 KUBA ELECTRONIC 16101 KURAZAI 18601 L&S ELECTRONIC 10301 LEADER 14801 LECSON 15701, 16201 LEGEND 14801 LENCO 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 LENOIR 14801 LEVIS AUSTRIA 15701, 16201 LEYCO 00401, 03701, 14701, 15701, 16201 LG 00301, 00401, 00901, 01601, 02601, 09001, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17701, 17901, 18901 LIESENK & TTER 00401, 15701, 16201 LIESENK?TTER 14701 LIESENKOTTER 14701, 15701, 16201 LIFE 14801 LIFETEC 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 LINITRON 15401 LLOYD 15401 LLOYD’S 14801 LODGENET 18401, 18601, 18701 LOEWE 06701, 14701, 15701, 16201 LOGIK 15701, 16201, 18401, 18601, 18701 LUMA 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 15901, 16201 LUMATRON 15701, 16201 LUX MAY 14701, 15701, 16201 LUXMAN 16301, 17901 LUXOR 04501, 04601, 15201, 16101 LXI 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02601, 14701, 16301, 16601, 17401, 17701, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18701 M ELECTRONIC00101, 00401, 01401, 01501, 01701, 02201, 03801, 04401, 04901, 06001, 14801 M ELECTRONICS14701, 14801 MACYS 15401 MADISON 15701, 16201 MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801, 14701, 14801 MAGNAFON 06801 MAGNASONIC14701, 14801, 15401 MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801, 12001, 12601, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17201, 17801, 17901 MAGNUM 15701, 16201 MAJESTIC 18401, 18601, 18701 MANESTH 03701, 04101, 14701, 15701, 16201 MANHATTAN 15701, 16201 MARANTZ 00301, 00401, 00801, 07001, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17901 MARK 00401, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 MASUDA 15701, 16201 MATSUI 00101, 00401, 02901, 04801, 06301, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301 MAVA 15401 MAXAM 14801 MAXELL 14801 MCE 14801 MEDIATOR 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 MEDION 08501, 10301, 11401, 15701, 16201 MEGATRON 01801, 02601, 16301, 17901 MELECTRONIC15701, 15801, 15901, 16101, 16201 MEMOREX 00101, 01901, 02001, 02601, 03401, 05801, 11401, 14801, 16301, 16801, 17901, 18401, 18601, 18701 MEMPHIS 14801 MERCURY 14801, 15701, 16201 METZ 05501, 15701, 16201 MGA 00301, 01901, 02601, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901, 18901, 19001 MICROMAXX 10301, 15701, 16201 MICROSTAR 10301 MIDLAND 00201, 00501, 00601, 15401, 16401, 16601, 17401, 18701 MINATO 15701, 16201 MINERVA 06301 MINOKA 05101, 14701, 15701, 16201 MINUTZ 19101 MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301, 01601, 01901, 02001, 02601, 02701, 03101, 03401, 06701, 11201, 11901, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 16301 16501, 17901, 19001 MIVAR 03901, 04001, 06801, 07601, 15201, 15301 MONTGOMERY WARD18401, 18601, PYMI QUASAR SAMSUX SAMTRON SANKY SANSEI SANSUI 15401, 17901 16701 15401 05601 05801, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16801 SANYO 01401, 02001, 02701, 02901, 04301, 10201, 14801, 15301, 15701, 16201, 16301, 18901 SAVE 15701, 16201 SBR 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 SCEPTRE 20201 SCHAUB LORENZ 04601, 15901, 16101 SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301, 04801, 08501, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15301, 15501, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16101, 16201 SCOTCH 02601, 16301, 17901 SCOTT 02601, 02701, 03101, 15401, 16301, 17901 SEARS 00501, 00801, 02001, 02101, 02501, 02601, 16301, 16601, 16701, 17201, 17401, 17901, 18101, 18201, 18401, 18701, 18901 SEG 03701, 08501, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16101, 16201 SEI 06801, 15701, 16101, 16201 SEI-SINUDYNE 14701, 15701, 16201 SELECO 02201, 03501, 15001, 15301 SEMIVOX 02701 SEMP 02101 SEMUA 15401 SENCORA 14801 SENTRA 16101 SHARP 00301, 01301, 08301, 15401, 16301, 17901 SHEN YING 00101, 01201 SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301, 03101 SHINTOSHI 15701, 16201 SHIVAKI 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 SHOGUN 16301 SHOW 14801 SIAREM 06801 SIEMENS 00401, 02801, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 SIERA 15701, 16201 SIERRA 14701 SIGNATURE 18401, 18601, 18701, 19301 SILMA 14701 SILVA 14801, 15701, 16201 SILVER 15701, 16201 SIMPSON 17801 SINGER 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SINUDYNE 06801, 14701, 15001, 15701, 16101, 16201 SKANTIC 04501 SKY 00401, 15701, 16201 SKYGIANT 02701 SKYWORTH 00401 SNYDER 14701 SOLAVOX 02201, 15701, 16201 SONIKO 15701, 16201 SONITRON 02901 SONNECLAIR 15701, 16201 SONOKO 00101, 00401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SONOLOR 02201, 02901 SONTEC 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 SONY 00001, 08301, 11101, 11601, 12701, 12901, 15701, 16201 SOUND & VISION PLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 14801 00601, 03401, 08301, 16401 QUELLE 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15101, 15201, 15401, 15501, 15701, 16101, 16201 R LINE 14701, 15701, 16201 RADIALVA 15701, 16201 RADIO SHACK15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18401, 18701, 18901 RADIOLA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 RADIOMARELLI06801, 15701, 16201 RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501, 02001, 02601, 02701 RADIOSTONE 16201 RADIOTONE 14701, 14801, 15701 RCA 00001, 00301, 00501, 01101, 01201, 02601, 08601, 11501, 11801, 13901, 12201, 12501, 12601, 12801, 15801, 16301, 16401 16501, 16601, 17401, 17901, 18401, 18701, 19001 REALISTIC 00301, 02001, 02601, 02701, 16301, 17701, 17901, 18401, 18701, 18901 RECOR 15701, 16201 RECORD 14701 RECTILIGNE 15701, 16201 REDIFFUSION 04601 REDSTAR 15701, 16201 REFLEX 15701, 16201 REGENTE 14801 REOC 09001 REVOX 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 REVOX/STUDER14701 REX 02201, 03501, 03701, 15001, 15301 RFT 05201, 15301, 15701, 16201 RICOH 15701, 16201 R-LINE 00401 RMB 15401 ROADSTAR 00101, 03701, 05201, 14801, 15701, 16201 RODEX 15701, 16201 ROSITA 14801 ROWA 14801 ROYAL 14801 RUKOPIR 15701, 16201 RUNCO 00201, 00301, 06501, 07501 SABA 01701, 02201, 03801, 04201, 15801, 16001 SACCS 03201 SAGEM 07701 SAISHO 00101, 03701, 06801, 14701 SAIVOD 15701, 16201 SAKURA 14801 SALORA 02201, 04601, 06901, 15201, 16101 SAMBERS 06801, 15101, 15201 SAMPO 00101, 00301, 01201, 01301, 02001, 02501, 02601, 08301, 13301, 15401, 16301, 17901, 18901 SAMSUNG 00101, 00301, 00401, 00901, 01101, 01201, 02001, 02601, 03701, 04701, 07001, 07401, 07801, 08901, 09801, 10501, 10701 14701, 14801, 15201, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 16601, 16701, 17901, 18101, 18901, 20301 PREPARATION 16201 OTTO-VERSAND14701, 14801, 14901 PACIFIC 15701, 16201 PAEL 15101 PALLADIUM 04701, 05201, 14701, 15701, 16101, 16201 PALSONIC 15701, 16201 PANAMA 03701, 14801, 15701, 16201 PANASHIBA 14801 PANASONIC 00401, 00601, 00801, 02201, 03401, 08301, 12401, 14701, 15701, 16201, 16401 PANAVISION 15701, 16201 PANAVOX 14801 PANORAMA 14801 PATHE CINEMA03201, 04101, 15301, 16101 PATHE MARCONI16001 PAUSA 00101, 14801 PCE/PEC 15401 PENNEY 00301, 00501, 00601, 00901, 02101, 02601, 12201, 15401 PERDIO 04101, 15701, 16201 PERFEKT 14701, 15701, 16201 PHILCO 00301, 00401, 00801, 01801, 02601, 02701, 03301, 05801, 13101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17801, 17901 PHILIPS 00001, 00301, 00401, 00601, 00801, 01201, 01601, 02601, 04901, 07001, 08801, 12601, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201, 16301 17201, 17301, 17801, 18201 PHILIPS (F) 14701 PHOENIX 14701, 15701, 16201 PHONOLA 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 PILOT 00301, 15701, 16201, 16301 PIONEER 01701, 02201, 02301, 03801, 08601, 09501, 11301, 14701, 15701, 15801, 16201, 16301, 17901 PLANTRON 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 POLAROID 19201, 19501, 19601 POPPY 14801 PORTLAND 01201, 15401, 15901, 16301, 16501, 17901 PRANDONI PRINCE15101 PRANDONI-PRINCE06801 PRICE CLUB 16701 PRIMA 09601, 14801, 15401, 17001, 17501 PRINCESS 14801 PRINZ 16101 PRISM 00601, 16401 PROELCO 14701 PROFEX 00101, 04601, 14801, 14901 PROFITRONIC 14701, 15701, 16201 PROLINE 15701, 16201 PROSCAN 00501, 16601, 17401, 18401, 18701 PROSONIC 15701, 15901, 16201 PROTEC 14701, 14801 PROTECH 00101, 00401, 03301, 03701, 05201, 08501, 15701, 16101 PROTECT 16201 PROTON 00101, 00301, 02601, 14801, 15401, 16301, 17901, 18901 PROVISION 15701, 16201 PULSAR 00201, 16301 PULSER 14701, 14801, 15401 PYE 14701, 15701, 15901, 16101, 16201 INTRODUCTION 18701 15701, 16201 01301, 14701 00301, 00901, 06701, 15401, 16101, 16301, 16501, 16701, 17901, 18101 MULTITEC 15701, 16201 MULTITECH 00101, 02701, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16101, 16201 MUSIKLAND 15701, 16201 MYRYAD 07001, 15701, 16201 NAD 02101, 02601, 04601, 11301, 16301, 17901, 18101 NAIKO 15701, 16201 NAKIMURA 15701, 15901, 16201 NAMSUNC 14801 NATIONAL 14701 NEC 00101, 00301, 00601, 02001, 02101, 02401, 02601, 05701, 06501, 13201, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201, 16301, 16501, 17901 NECKERMANN00401, 07001, 14701, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16101, 16201 NEI 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 NETSAT 00401, 15701, 16201 NEUFUNK 15701, 16201 NEWAVE 00101, 01201, 01301, 02601 NEWTECH 14701, 14801, 15701, 15801, 16201 NEXXTECH 17501 NIKKAI 00401, 03701, 14701, 15401, 15701, 16201 NIKKO 00301, 01201, 02601, 16301, 17901 NOBLEX 14801 NOBLIKO 15101 NOGAMATIC 16001 NOKIA 04601, 05901, 06001, 06901, 08101, 14801, 15901, 16101 NONAME 14701 NORCENT 09301, 10801 NORDMENDE 01701, 03801, 07101, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16201 NORMEREL 15701, 16201 NOVABEAM 14701 NOVATRONIC 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 NTC 01201 O GENERAL 14801 OCEANIC 02201, 04601 OKANO 14801, 15701, 16201 OLEVIA 19701, 19801, 19901, 20001 OLYMPIC 14801 ONCEAS 14801 ONWA 02701, 05301 OPERA 14701, 15701, 16201 OPTIMUS 02001, 02301, 03401, 08301 OPTONICA 01301 ORBIT 14701, 15701, 16201 ORIENT 14801 ORION 00401, 03101, 04101, 05801, 06801, 14701, 14801, 15401, 15701, 16201, 16801 ORLINE 15701, 16201 ORMOND 15701, 16201 OSAKI 03701, 05101, 15701, 15901, 16201 OSIO 15701, 16201 OSUME 15701, 16201 OTF 14801 OTTO VERSAND00401, 04101, 06701, 07001, 14701, 14801, 14901, 15501, 15601, 15701, 15801, 16101, MORGAN’S MOTOROLA MTC 47 En 15701, 15901, 16201 SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701, 15401, 16301, 17801, 17901 SOUNDMASTER 14801 SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201, 15701, 16201 SOWA 00601, 00901, 01201, 02101, 02601 SPECTRICIAN 14701, 15401 SQUAREVIEW 02501, 18201 SSS 02701, 16301 STANDARD 00101, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 STARLITE 02701, 14801, 15701, 16201 STARLUX 14801 STERN 02201, 03501, 15001, 15301 STRATO 15701, 16201 SUNIC LINE 15701, 16201 SUNKAI 15701, 16201 SUNSTAR 14801, 15701, 16201 SUNWOOD 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 SUPERSCAN 17201 SUPERTEC 14801 SUPERTECH 14801, 15701, 16201 SUPRA 14801, 15901, 16301 SUPREMACY 15401 SUPREME 00001 SUTRON 14801 SYC LINE 14801 SYLVANIA 00301, 00801, 02501, 14701, 16301, 16801, 17201, 17701, 17801, 17901, 18201 SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701, 15401, 17201, 17701, 18201 SYNCO 00001, 00901, 01201, 01301, 02601, 05601 SYNTAX 19701 SYSLINE 00401, 15701, 16201 T+A 05501 TACICO 00101, 01201, 02601 TAI YI 00101 TANDBERG 15001 TANDY 01301, 02201 TASHIKO 01201, 08301 TATUNG 00101, 00401, 00601, 00801, 00901, 02001, 02101, 06801, 14701, 15701, 16201, 18801 TCM 10301 TEAC 00101, 00401, 03701, 05101, 05201, 05701, 08501, 11401, 15701, 16101, 16201 TEAK 14801 TEC 03301, 14801, 15001, 15701, 16201 TECH LINE 15701, 16201 TECHNEMA 04101 TECHNICS 00601, 03401, 08301, 14701, 16401 TECHNILAND 14701 TECHNISAT 15701, 16201 TECHNOL 14801 TECHWOOD 00601, 16301, 16401, 17901 TECNISON 14801 TECO 00101, 00601, 01201, 01301, 02601, 03701, 08401 TEDELEX 14801, 15701, 16201 TEKNANT 14701, 14801 TEKNIKA 00801, 00901, 01201, 01901, 02701, 15401, 16301, 16501, 16701, 17801, 17901, 18101, 18401, 18601, 18701, 18901, TEKON 14801 TELEAVIA 15801, 16001 TELECOR 15701, 16201 TELEFAC 14801 TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601, 04201, 48 En 08001, 08901, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16201 TELEFUSION 15701, 16201 TELEGAZI 15701, 16201 TELEMEISTER 04101, 15701, 16201 TELEOPTA 14801 TELERENT 18401, 18601, 18701 TELESONIC 15701, 16201 TELESTAR 14801, 15701, 16201 TELETECH 00101, 14801, 15701, 16201 TELETON 16101 TELEVIEW 15701, 16201 TEMPEST 14801, 15701, 16201 TENNESSEE 15701, 16201 TENSAI 04101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 15901, 16201 TENSON 14801 TERA 00301, 16301 TESLA 14701 TESLA ORAVA14701 TEVION 15701, 16201 TEXET 15901 THOMAS 14701, 14801, 15401 THOMSON 01701, 03801, 07101, 08001, 12501, 15701, 15801, 16001, 16101, 16201 THORN 00401, 01401, 04601, 06701, 14701, 15101, 15701, 15801, 15901, 16201 THORN-FERGUSON 14701, 15001 TMK 02601, 16301, 17901 TNCI 00201 TOBO 14801 TOKAI 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 TOSHIBA 00901, 02001, 02101, 06601, 07801, 08301, 10901, 12101, 12301, 13001, 13201, 16701, 18101, 18901 TOSONIC 15401 TOTEVISION 15401 TOWADA 16101 TRANS CONTINENS 15701, 16201 TRANSONIC 15701, 16201 TREVI 14801 TRIAD 14701, 15701, 16201 TRILUX 14701 TRIUMPH 06801, 15701, 16201 TRIVISION 14801 TUNTEX 00101, 00301, 01201 TVS 05801 TVTEXT 95 16201 UHER 04101, 14701, 15701, 15901, 16201 ULTRAVOX 15701, 15901, 16201 UMA 14701 UNIC LINE 15701, 16101, 16201 UNIMOR 14701 UNITED 15701, 16201 UNIVERSAL 17301, 19101 UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401, 01501, 03701, 04401, 04701, 06401, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16101, 16201 UNIVOX 15701, 16201 URANYA 14801 VANGUARD 14801 VECO 14801 VECTOR RESEARCH 00301 VESTEL 00401, 14701, 15701, 16201 VEXA 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 VICTOR 00701, 03401, 08301, 08401 VIDEO SYSTEM 14701, 15701, 16201 VIDEOSAT 03301 VIDEOTECHNIC 15901 00801 14801 02601, 16301, 16501, 17901 VIEWSONIC 13301 VISION 04101, 14801, 15701, 16201 VISON 14701 VIZIO 18801 VORTEC 14701, 15701, 16201 VOXSON 02201, 14701, 15701, 16201 WALTHAM 04501, 15701, 16201 WARDS 00301, 00801, 02601, 11301, 14701, 16301, 16501, 17301, 17801, 17901, 18401, 18601, 18701, 19101 WATSON 00401, 04101, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 WATT RADIO 16101 WAYCON 02101 WEGA 15701, 16201 WEGAVOX 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 WELTBLICK 14701, 15701, 16201 WESTON 15701, 16201 WHARFEDALE 15701, 16201 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 00401, 04101, 05801, 07901, 14701, 15701, 16201, 17701 WINSTON 14701, 14801 WINTERNITZ 14801 WORLDVIEW 14701, 14801 XRYPTON 15701, 16201 YAMAHA 00301, 01801, 08301, 10001, 11001, 13501, 13601, 13701, 13801, 14001, 14101, 14201, 16301, 16501, 17901 YAMAJI 03609 YAMISHI 15701, 16201 YAPSHE 03401 YOKAN 15701, 16201 YOKO 00401, 03701, 14701, 14801, 15701, 16201 YORK 14701 ZENITH 00201, 01201, 02601, 05801, 14701, 16301, 16801, 17701, 17901, 18601, 19301 VIDIKRON VIDION VIDTECH DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 02805, 05605 AIWA 05605, 05705, 07105 AKAI 07505 ALBA 02605 AMSTRAD 02305 APEX 07605, 08705 APEX DIGITAL 02105, 02605, 03005, 03505, 03605, 03705, 04105, 05805 AUDIOVOX 08805 AXION 08805 BBK 06105, 06205, 06305, 06405, 06505, 06605, 06705, 06805, 06905, 07005 BLAUPINKT 02605 BLAUPUNKT 08705 BLUE PARADE 01005 BLUE SKY 05805 BRANDT 06005 BUSH 02305, 05905 CENTREX 02105 CENTRIOS 08805 CINEVISION 07405 CLASSIC 05605 CLATRONIC 03405 COBY 07305, 07605, 07905, 08005, 08105, 08305, 08505 CONCEPT 08705 CONIA 05805 CROWN 06005 CURTIS INTERNATIONAL 08505 CYBERHOME 02405 CYTRON 06005 DAEWOO 03205, 03305 DANSAI 03205 DECCA 03205 DENON 00005 DIAMOND 03105, 06005 DIGITREX 02105, 07605 Digitrex 05805 DISNEY 08405 DUAL 05605, 06005 DURABRAND 07405 DVD2000 00205 ELTA 05905, 07205, 07505 EMERSON 01205, 07405, 07805, 08405, 08605 ENTERPRISE 01205 FERGUSON 06005 FISHER 02005 FUNAI 07805, 08405 GE 00305, 02605, 08705 GO VIDEO 02505 GOLDSTAR 02905, 07405 GOODMANS 05905, 06005 GRADIENTE 01805 GREENHILL 02605, 08705 GRUNDIG 00705, 06005 HARMAN KARDON 08205 HARMAN/KARDON 05505 HELIOS 09205 HITACHI 01105, 01905 HITEKER 02105, 05805, 07605 INITIAL 08705 INSIGNIA 07405, 07705, 07805, 08705, 08805 JBL 08205 JVC 00905, 01305 KENWOOD 00005, 00605 KLH 02605, 08705 KONKA 07705 KOSS 01805 KXD 07305 LENCO 06005 LENOXX 05905, 07505 LG 02905, 07405 LIFETEC 06005 LIMIT 03105 LIQUIDVIDEO 08805 MAGNAVOX 00105, 02205, 07805 MARANTZ 00705, 07405 MATSUI 06005 MBO 05905 MEDION 06005 MEMOREX 03805 MICO 02705 MICROSOFT 00305 MINTEK 02605, 08705 MITSUBISHI 00205 MUSTEK 02805, 05605 Mx ONDA 06005 NAD 07405 NESA 02605, 08705 NORCENT 08005, 08505 ONKYO 00105 OPPO 08905, 09005, 09105 ORITRON 01805, 06005 PALSONIC 02105, 05805 PANASONIC 00005, 01605, 04205 PHILIPS 00105, 00705, 01705, 03905, 07805, 08405 PIONEER 00405, 01005, 01505, 01605 POLK AUDIO 00705 PORTLAND 07505 PROLINE 06005 PROSCAN 00305 PROSONIC 08005 QWESTAR 01805 01307 00907 00307 00707 00207 00807 00607 01007, 01107 00507 01207 00407 00007, 00107 DVD RECORDER PHILIPS VICTOR YAMAHA 00806 01406 00706 VCR ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA APPENDIX 01102 00002 02102 00002, 00402, 02202, 02602, 02702 AKAI 00602, 02302, 04902, 05902, 06602 AKIBA 01402 ALBA 01402, 02102, 02302, 02702 AMERICA ACTION LOEWE OPTA 04602 LOGIK 01402, 02002 LUXOR 00802, 01102, 01602, 04902 LXI 00402, 05702, 05902 M ELECTRONIC 00002, 04702 MAGNASONIC 04302 MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302, 00502, 01502, 05602, 05902, 06402 MAGNIN 02002, 05502 MANESTH 00902, 01402 MARANTZ 00302, 01502, 04602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06402 MARTA 00402, 05702 MATSUI 02602, 02702, 05002 MATSUSHITA 00302, 06402 MEDION 02602 MEI 00302, 06402 MEMOREX 00002, 00302, 00402, 00502, 01002, 01102, 01602, 02002, 02202, 02602, 04202, 04702, 05502, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302 06402 MEMPHIS 01402 METZ 00402, 02502, 04502, 04602, 05202 MGA 00802, 02002 MGN TECHNOLOGY 02002, 05502 MINERVA 04602 MINOLTA 00702, 06202, 06502 MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802, 01302, 01502, 03502, 05802, 06002, 06202 MOTOROLA 00302, 01102, 06402 MTC 00002, 02002, 04702, 05502, 05902, 06302 MULTITECH 00002, 01402, 04702, 05502, 05902, 06302 MURPHY 00002, 04702 MYRYAD 01502 NAD 01602 NATIONAL 01902, 04802 NEC 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102, 01302, 01602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 NECKERMANN 01502, 04602, 05002 NESCO 01402 NEWAVE 00402 NIKKO 00402, 05702 NOBLEX 02002, 05502 NOBLIKO 04602 NOKIA 00602, 01602, 02002, 04902 NORDMENDE 00602, 02402 OCEANIC 00002, 00602 OKANO 02302, 02602 OLYMPUS 00302, 01902, 04802, 06402 OPTIMUS 00402, 01102, 01602, 02802, 05502, 05702 OPTONICA 05502 ORION 01702, 02602, 02702, 04402, 05002 OSAKA 04702 OSAKI 00002, 00402, 01402, 04702 OTTO VERSAND 01502 PALLADIUM 00402, 00602, 01402 PANASONIC 00302, 01802, 01902, 03102, 03702, 04502, 04802, 05102, 05302, 05602, 06402 PATHE MARCONI 00602 PENNEY 00302, 00402, 00702, 02002, 03702, 04202 ADVANCED OPERATION DENON LG LOEWE MARANTZ ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SAMSUMG SHARP SONY YAMAHA 01402 01002, 01602, 05402, 06102 FUJI 00202, 00302, 06402 FUJITSU 00002, 00902 FUNAI 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 GARRARD 00002, 06302 GE 00302, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802, 05502, 05602, 06402 GEC 01502 GENERAL 00902 GO VIDEO 02802 GOLDHAND 01402 GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802, 02902, 04202, 05402, 05702, 05902 GOODMANS 00002, 00402, 01402, 02102, 04702 GO-VIDEO 05502 GRADIENTE 00002, 06302 GRAETZ 00602, 01602, 02002 GRANADA 01502, 01602 GRANADA (UK) 04602, 04802 GRANDIN 00002, 00402, 01402 GRUNDIG 01402, 01502, 01902, 02502, 04602 HANSEATIC 00402 HARLEY DAVIDSON 00002, 06302 HARMAN KARDON 05402 HARMAN/KARDON 01502 HARWOOD 01402 HCM 01402 HEADQUARTER 05902, 06102, 06502, 06602 HINARI 01402, 02002, 02702, 05002 HI-Q 01002 HITACHI 00002, 00402, 00602, 00702, 02002, 04702, 06202 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 00702 HYPSON 01402 IMPERIAL 00002, 04702 INSIGNIA 05702 INSTANT REPLAY 05902, 06402 INTEQ 05702 INTERFUNK 01502 ITT 00602, 01602, 02002, 04902 ITT-NOKIA 04902 ITV 00402, 02102 JC PENNEY 05402, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06202, 06402, 06502, 06602, 06702 JCL 06402 JENSEN 00602, 06202, 06602 JVC 00602, 00902, 01302, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 KAISUI 01402 KEC 00402, 02102 KENDO 04902 KENWOOD 00602, 01302, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06102, 06602 KLH 01402 KODAK 00302, 00402, 05702, 06402 KOLIN 00602, 00802 KORPEL 01402 LENCO 02102 LEYCO 01402 LG 00402, 00702, 00902, 02902, 05902 LLOYD 04702, 05902, 06302 LLOYD’S 00002 LOEWE 00402, 01502, 04502 FISHER PLAYBACK FEATURES BD PLAYER 02102 AMERICAN HIGH 00302, 06402 AMSTRAD 00002, 04702 ANAM 00402, 01902, 02002, 02102, 02902 ANAM NATIONAL 01902, 04502 ANITECH 01402 ASA 00402, 01502 ASHA 02002, 05502 ASUKA 00402 AUDIO DYNAMICS 05402, 05802, 06002 AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102, 05702 BAIRD 00002, 00602, 01602, 04902 BASIC LINE 01402, 02102 BEAUMARK 02002, 05502 BELL & HOWELL 01602, 06102 BLAUPUNKT 01902, 04602, 04802, 05102, 05302 BRANDT 02402 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 00602 BROKSONIC 01702, 02602, 04402 BUSH 01402, 02102, 02702 CALIX 00402, 05702 CANDLE 05402, 05502, 05702 CANNON 05602, 06402 CANON 00302 CARVER 01502 CCE 01402, 02102 CGE 00002, 04702 CIMLINE 01402 CINERAL 02102 CINEVISION 05702 CITIZEN 00402, 02102, 04302, 05402, 05502, 05702 COLORTYME 05402 COLT 01402 COMBITECH 02702 CRAIG 00402, 01002, 01402, 02002, 05502, 05702 CROWN 01402, 02102 CURTIS MATHES 00302, 00602, 01202, 03702, 05402, 05502, 05602, 05902, 06402 CYBERNEX 02002, 05502 CYRUS 01502 DAEWOO 00902, 01602, 02102, 03402, 04302, 06302 DANSAI 01402 DBX 05402, 05802, 06002 DE GRAAF 00702 DECCA 00002, 01502, 04702 DEGRAAF 04702 DENON 00702 DIMENSIA 05602 DUAL 00602 DUMONT 00002, 01502, 01602, 04702 DURABRAND 05702 DYNATECH 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 ELCATECH 01402 ELECTROHOME 00402, 05702 ELECTROPHONIC 00402, 05702 EMEREX 00102 EMERSON 00002, 00302, 00402, 00802, 00902, 01702, 02002, 02102, 04302, 04402, 04702, 05002, 05502, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 ESC 02002, 02102 FERGUSON 00602, 02402 FIDELITY 00002, 04702 FINLANDIA 01502, 01602 FINLUX 00002, 00702, 01502, 01602, 04702, 04802, 04902 FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802, 00902, PREPARATION 00305, 01005, 02605, 08705 RIO 07405 ROADSTAR 05905 ROTEL 01305 SABA 06005 SAMSUNG 01105, 04505 SANYO 02005 SCHNEIDER 06005 SCOTT 05805, 06005 SEARS 07805 SHANGHAI 05805 SHARP 01405 SHERWOOD 03205 SHINCO 08705 SHINSONIC 00505, 08705 SINGER 05905 SKYMASTER 05605 SLIM ART 03305 SM ELECTRONIC 02805 SM ELECTRONICS 05605, 05905 SONY 00505, 04005 STANDARD 06005 SUPERSCAN 07805 SV2000 07805 SVA 05805 SYLVANIA 02205, 07805, 08405 SYMPHONIC 07805, 08405, 08605 TATUNG 03205 TEAC 01005, 02605 TECHNICS 00005 TENSAI 05905, 06005 TEVION 06005 THETA DIGITAL 01005 THOMSON 00305 TOSHIBA 00105, 04605 URBAN CONCEPTS 00105 VOXSON 05605 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 08405 XBOX 00305 YAMAHA 00005, 00705, 00805, 04305, 04405 YUKAI 05605 ZENITH 00105, 01205, 02905, 07405 ZEUS 03305 INTRODUCTION RCA 49 En PENTAX 00702, 05402, 06202, 06502 PERDIO 00002, 04702 PHILCO 00302, 05602, 06402 PHILIPS 00302, 01502, 03202, 03902, 04002, 04602, 06402 PHONOLA 01502 PILOT 00402, 05702 PIONEER 00702, 01302, 01502, 05802, 06002, 06202, 06702 POLK AUDIO 01502 PROFITRONIC 02002 PROLINE 00002, 04702 PROSCAN 01202, 03802, 05602 PROTEC 01402 PULSAR 00502 PYE 01502 QUARTER 06102 QUARTZ 06102 QUASAR 00302, 03702, 05602, 06402 QUELLE 01502, 04602, 04802, 05002 RADIO SHACK 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 RADIOLA 01502 RADIOSHACK 00002 RADIX 00402, 05702 RANDEX 00402, 05702 RCA 00302, 00702, 01202, 02002, 03502, 03702, 03802, 05502, 05602, 05702, 06202, 06402, 06502 REALISTIC 00002, 00302, 00402, 01002, 01102, 01602, 04702, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06102, 06302, 06402 REOC 02602 REPLAYTV 03002, 03102 REX 00602 RIO 05702 ROADSTAR 00402, 01402, 02002, 02102 RUNCO 00502 SABA 00602, 02402 SAISHO 05002 SALORA 00802 SAMPO 00402, 01102 SAMSUNG 00902, 02002, 02802, 05502, 06202 SANKY 00502, 01102 SANSUI 00002, 00602, 01302, 04402, 05802, 06002, 06602 SANYO 01002, 01602, 02002, 05502, 06102 SAVILLE 02702 SBR 01502 SCHAUB LORENZ 00002, 00602, 01602 SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402, 01502, 04702 SCOTT 00802, 00902, 01702 SEARS 00002, 00302, 00402, 00702, 01002, 01602, 04202, 05702, 06102, 06202, 06402, 06502, 06702 SEG 02002 SEI 01502 SELECO 00602 SEMP 00902 SHARP 01102, 03502, 05902 SHINTOM 01402, 01602, 06202 SHOGUN 05502 SIEMENS 00402, 01502, 01602, 04602 SIGNATURE 05902 SILVA 00402 SINGER 00902, 01402, 06402 SINUDYNE 01502, 05202 50 En SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102 SONTEC 00402 SONY 00002, 00102, 00202, 00302, 03302, 04102, 04702 STS 00702, 06202, 06402, 06502 SUNKAI 02602 SUNSTAR 00002, 04702 SUNTRONIC 00002 SYLVANIA 00002, 00302, 00802, 01502, 04702, 05602, 05902, 06302, 06402 SYMPHONIC 00002, 04702, 05902, 06302 TANDBERG 05002, 05202 TANDY 00002, 01602, 05902, 06102 TASHIKO 00002, 00402, 04702, 05702 TATUNG 00002, 00602, 00902, 01302, 01502, 04702, 06602 TEAC 00002, 00602, 02102, 02202, 03402, 04702, 05902, 06302, 06602 TECHNICS 00302, 01902, 04802, 06402 TECO 00302, 00402, 00602, 01102 TEKNIKA 00002, 00302, 00402, 04702, 05702, 05902, 06302, 06402 TELEAVIA 00602 TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402 TENOSAL 01402 TENSAI 00002 THOMAS 00002 THOMSON 00602, 01202, 01302, 02402 THORN 00602, 01602 TIVO 03202, 03302 TMK 02002, 05002, 05502 TOSHIBA 00602, 00802, 00902, 01302, 01502, 03602, 06202 TOTEVISION 00402, 02002, 05502, 05702 UHER 02002 UNITECH 02002, 05502 UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402, 01502, 02002 VECTOR 00902 VECTOR RESEARCH 05402, 05802, 06002 VICTOR 00602, 01302, 05802, 06002 VIDEO CONCEPTS 00902, 05402, 05802, 06002 VIDEOMAGIC 00402 VIDEOSONIC 02002, 05502 VILLAIN 00002 WARDS 00002, 00302, 00702, 01002, 01102, 01202, 01402, 01502, 02002, 05502, 05602, 05702, 05902, 06202, 06302, 06402, 06502 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 01402, 05902 XR-1000 00002, 00302, 01402, 06302, 06402 YAMAHA 00602, 05402, 05802, 06002, 06602 YAMISHI 01402 YOKAN 01402 YOKO 02002 ZENITH 00002, 00202, 00502, 04402, 05702, 05802, 05902, 06002 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 00103, 00203, 02803, 04703 ADELPHIA ALLEGRO AMERICAST ANTRONIX ARCHER 04503 02903, 03403 02003 03703, 03803 03703, 03803, 04003, 04303 AT&T 04503 BELL SOUTH 02003 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 00803 BRITISH TELECOM 00103 CABLETENNA 03703 CABLEVIEW 03703 CENTURY 04303 CITIZEN 04303 COGECO 04503 COMCAST 04503 COMTRONICS 03103 CONTEC 03503 DAERYUNG 00203, 01403, 01903 DIRECTOR 01303 FILMNET 01203 GARRARD 04303 GC ELECTRONICS 03803 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703 GENERAL INSTRUMENT (GI) 02803, 04503, 04703, 04803 GOLDSTAR 00503 HAMLIN 00303, 00703 HITACHI 04703 JASCO 04303 JERROLD 00103, 00803, 01303, 01703, 02803, 04203, 04703 LG 00503 MAGNAVOX 03203 MEMOREX 00003 MNET 01203 MOTOROLA 00803, 01303, 01703, 02303, 02803, 04503, 04703, 04803 MOVIE TIME 03603 NOKIA 04903 NOOS 01803 NSC 03603 OAK 03503, 03903 PACE 00603, 02203 PANASONIC 00003, 00203, 00403, 02703 PARAGON 00003 PHILIPS 01003, 01103, 03203, 04303 PHILIPS-MAGNAVOX 03003, 03303 PIONEER 00503, 01603, 01903 PULSAR 00003 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 00103 QUASAR 00003 RADIO SHACK 03003, 03303, 03403 RCA 02403, 02503, 04303 REALISTIC 03803 REGAL 00703, 00903 REMBRANDT 04703 RUNCO 00003 SAGEM 01803 SAMSUNG 00003, 00503 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 00203, 01403, 01903 SHAW 04503 SIGNATURE 04703 SONY 02103 STARCOM 00103 SUPERCABLE 00803 TANDY 04103 TELE+1 01203 TOCOM 02803, 04203, 04403, 04803 TORX 00103 TOSHIBA 00003 TRANS PX 00803 TS 00103 TV86 03603 UNIKA 03703, 03803, 04303 UNITED CABLE 00103 UNIVERSAL 02903, 03703, 03803, 04003, 04303, 04603 VIEWSTAR 03103, 03203, 03603, 04103 VERIZON FIOS 05003, 05103 ZENITH 00003, 01503, 02003, 03403, 04303 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 06404 ABSAT 00104 ALBA 01404 ALPHASTAR 02504 AMSTRAD 03004 ASTON 00304, 05004 ASTRO 00604 ATSAT 06404 AVALON 01304 BLAUPUNKT 00604 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 03004, 05204 CANAL DIGITAL 03104 CANAL SATELLITE 03104 CANAL+ 03104 CHAPARRAL 00804 CITYCOM 05304 COMAG 09004, 09104, 09704, 10104, 10304, 11604, 11704, 11804, 12004 CONNEXIONS 01304 CROSSDIGITAL 04604 CYRUS 00704 DAERYUNG 01304 DAEWOO 06304 D-BOX 02104, 04904 DIGENIUS 01104 DIRECTV 00904, 01204, 01504, 01704, 02204, 02304, 02804, 04104, 04604, 05104, 06904 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 02604, 03704 DISHPRO 02604, 03704 DISTRATEL 00004 DMT 04004 DNT 00704, 01304 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 05804 DREAMBOX 08604, 08704, 09604, 09804, 09904, 10004, 10404, 10604 ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304, 01604, 02604, 03104, 03604, 03704, 04304 ENGEL 03804 EXPRESSVU 02604 FINLUX 01404 FOXTEL 07004, 07104, 07204, 07304, 07404 FRACARRO 03604 FTE 03404 FUBA 01304 GALAXIS 03404, 04704 GE 01504 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 03504, 08204, 08304 GOI 02604 GOLD BOX 03104 GRUNDIG 00604, 03004 HIRSCHMANN 00604, 01304 HITACHI 01404, 02804 HOUSTON 08504, 10704, 10804, 11004, 11104, 11304, 11904 HTS 02604 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM WISI XSAT ZEHNDER ZENITH 00604, 01304, 01404 00104 04004 03304 INTRODUCTION PREPARATION PLAYBACK FEATURES ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX 02304, 05104, 06904 03404, 05304 03604 02604 00104, 00604, 00704, 01004, 01804, 05604 KREISELMEYER 00604 LABGEAR 06304 LOGIX 03804 LORENZEN 01104 MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204 MANHATTAN 01404, 03804, 04204 MARANTZ 00704 MEDIASAT 03104 MEMOREX 02204 METRONIC 00004 MITSUBISHI 02304 MOTOROLA 03504 MYRYAD 00704 NEXT LEVEL 03504 NOKIA 01404, 02104, 02404, 04904, 05704, 06804 OCTALTV 03704 ORBITECH 04504 PACE 01404, 03004, 05204, 06604 PANASONIC 00904, 01904, 03004, 06504 PANDA 01404 PAYSAT 02204 PHILIPS 00204, 00704, 01404, 02004, 02204, 02304, 03104, 04104, 05104, 06904 PIONEER 03104 PRIMESTAR 08204, 08304 PROMAX 01404 PROSCAN 01204, 01504 RADIOLA 00704 RADIOSHACK 03504 RADIX 01304 RCA 00404, 01204, 01504, 03204 RFT 00704 SABRE 01404 SAGEM 02904, 04804, 05904 SAMSUNG 03804, 04604, 06004, 06204 SAT CONTROL 06404 SATSTATION 04204 SCHWAIGER 04704 SEEMANN 01304 SIEMENS 00604 SKY 03004, 03304, 05204, 12104, 12204, 12304 SKY HD 12404 SKY MASTER 07504, 07604, 07704, 07804, 07904, 08004 SKY+ (SKY Digital +) 08104 STARCHOICE 08204, 08304 SM ELECTRONIC 05404 SMART 08804, 08904, 09204, 09304, 09404, 09504, 10204, 10304, 10504, 10904, 11204, 11404, 11504 SONY 01704, 03004, 06704 STAR CHOICE 03504 STRONG 06404 TANTEC 01404 TECHNISAT 04404, 04504 TELESTAR 04504 THOMSON 01404, 03104, 03904, 06104 Tivo 08404 TOPFIELD 05504 TOSHIBA 02304, 02704, 06904 TPS 02904, 05904 ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704 UNIDEN 02004, 02204 UNIVERSUM 00604 VENTANA 00704 HUMAX INVIDEO JVC KATHREIN 51 En Index ■ Numerics 2-channel source surround decode ............................... 24 3Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 24 5.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 23 5.1-channel source 7.1-channel decode ........................ 24 5Beam, beam mode ...................................................... 23 5BeamPlus2, beam mode ............................................. 24 7.1ch beam mode .......................................................... 24 ■ A AC IN jack ..................................................................... 8 AC ON STANDBY, ADVANCED SETUP ................ 38 Adaptive DRC, Dynamic range control ....................... 34 Adaptive dynamic range control, Dynamic range control 34 Adjusting volume level automatically UniVolume ...... 28 ADVANCED SETUP .................................................. 37 Adventure. CINEMA DSP program ............................ 23 Attaching stands, installation ....................................... 10 Audio / video component connection ........................... 13 AUDIO DELAY, SOUND SET MENU ...................... 33 Audio delay, SOUND SET MENU .............................. 33 AUDIO IN jacks ............................................................. 8 Audio Sampling, input signal information ................... 29 AUDIO SELECT, HDMI setup ................................... 36 Audio select, HDMI setup ............................................ 36 AUTO DIMMER, Front panel display setup ............... 36 Auto dimmer, Front panel display setup ...................... 36 AUTO LIP SYNC, Audio delay .................................. 33 Auto Preset, option menu ............................................. 29 AUTO SETUP .............................................................. 15 AUTO SETUP, Error messages ................................... 18 Automatic lipsync, Audio delay ................................... 33 Automatic preset, option menu .................................... 29 AUX1/2, Audio delay .................................................. 33 AV button, Remote control ............................................ 9 AV key, controlling external component ..................... 39 ■ B BASS EXT indicator ...................................................... 7 BASS EXTENSION, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34 Bass extension, SOUND SET MENU ......................... 34 BASS OUT, Subwoofer settings .................................. 33 Bass out, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33 Bass sound output redirection, Sound output ............... 35 BEAM ADJUSTMENT, MANUAL SETUP .............. 32 Beam adjustment, MANUAL SETUP ......................... 32 Beam mode, 5.1ch ........................................................ 23 Beam mode, 7.1ch ........................................................ 24 Blu-ray disc player connection ..................................... 12 ■ C cardboard microphone stand assemble ......................... 16 CENTER PRE OUT jack ............................................. 38 Center SP Size, Sound output ...................................... 35 Center speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output ........ 35 CH key, controlling external component ..................... 39 CH keys, Remote control ............................................... 9 CHANNEL LEVEL, SOUND SET MENU ................ 34 Channel level, SOUND SET MENU ........................... 34 CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................. 7 CINEMA DSP program keys, Remote control .............. 9 CINEMA DSP programs .............................................. 22 Clear preset station, option menu ................................. 29 Clear Preset, option menu ............................................ 29 CODE SET key, controlling external component ........ 39 CODE SET key, Remote control ................................... 9 Concert Hall. CINEMA DSP program ......................... 23 Configuring input source settings ................................ 28 Connecting audio / video components ......................... 13 Connecting Blu-ray disc player .................................... 12 Connecting external components ................................. 12 Connecting FM antenna ............................................... 13 Connecting subwoofer .................................................. 14 52 En Connecting TV ............................................................. 12 Connections ................................................................. 12 Controlling external component .................................. 39 Corner installation, placement ..................................... 11 CROSS OVER, Subwoofer settings ............................ 33 Crossover, Subwoofer settings .................................... 33 Cursor keys, controlling external component .............. 39 Cursor keys, Remote control ......................................... 9 Customizing this unit ................................................... 30 ■ D Decoder indicators ................................................... 7, 21 Decoder Mode, option menu ....................................... 29 Decoder mode, option menu ........................................ 29 DEMO MODE, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 38 Demo mode, ADVANCED SETUP ............................ 38 DIGITAL IN jacks ......................................................... 8 Display language change ............................................. 15 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................ 36 Displaying input signal information ............................ 29 Displaying the Radio Data System information .......... 26 DISTANCE, Subwoofer settings ................................. 33 Distance, Subwoofer settings ....................................... 33 Dolby Digital Plus, glossary ........................................ 43 Dolby Digital Surround EX, glossary .......................... 43 Dolby Digital, glossary ................................................ 43 Dolby Pro Logic II, glossary ....................................... 43 Dolby Pro Logic IIx, glossary ..................................... 43 Dolby Surround, glossary ............................................ 43 Dolby TrueHD, glossary .............................................. 43 Dolby/DTS DRC, Dynamic range control ................... 34 Drama. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23 DRC:Dynamic Range CTRL, SOUND SET MENU .. 34 DTS 96/24, glossary .................................................... 43 DTS Digital Surround, glossary .................................. 43 DTS Neo:6, glossary .................................................... 43 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, glossary ................. 43 DTS-HD Master Audio, glossary ................................ 43 Dynamic range control, SOUND SET MENU ............ 34 Dynamic range of Dolby Digitaland DTS signals, Dynamic range control ............................................ 34 ■ E ENHANCER indicator .................................................. 7 ENTER key, controlling external component ............. 39 ENTER key, Remote control ......................................... 9 ENTERTAINMENT. CINEMA DSP program ........... 23 Entertainment. CINEMA DSP program ...................... 23 Error messages, AUTO SETUP .................................. 18 External amplifier using .............................................. 38 External component connection .................................. 12 External component control ......................................... 39 External component operation keys, controlling external component ............................................................... 39 External component operation keys, Remote control .... 9 ■ F F.DISPLAY SETUP, DISPLAY MENU .................... 36 F.PANEL KEY, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 37 FACTORY PRESET, ADVANCED SETUP .............. 38 Factory preset, ADVANCED SETUP ......................... 38 FM antenna connection ................................................ 13 FM ANTENNA jack ...................................................... 8 FM Mode, option menu ............................................... 29 FM receiving mode, option menu ................................ 29 FM tuner, troubleshooting ........................................... 41 FM tuning .................................................................... 25 Frequency tuning, FM tuning ...................................... 25 Front panel ..................................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 6, 7 Front panel display setup, DISPLAY MENU ............. 36 Front panel input key, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37 Front panel key, ADVANCED SETUP ....................... 37 FRONT PRE OUT jacks ............................................. 38 Front SP Size, Sound output ........................................ 35 Front speaker size for PRE OUT, Sound output .......... 35 ■ G Game. CINEMA DSP program .................................... 23 General, troubleshooting .............................................. 40 Group ID, Wireless setup ............................................. 36 ■ H HDMI control function ................................................ 28 HDMI CONTROL, INPUT MENU ............................. 36 HDMI control, INPUT MENU .................................... 36 HDMI indicator .............................................................. 7 HDMI jacks .................................................................... 8 HDMI SETUP, INPUT MENU ................................... 36 HDMI setup, INPUT MENU ....................................... 36 HDMI, Audio delay ..................................................... 33 HDMI, glossary ............................................................ 44 ■ I IMAGE LOCATION, MANUAL SETUP .................. 32 Image location, MANUAL SETUP ............................. 32 INFO key, Remote control ............................................. 9 INPUT ASSIGNMENT, INPUT MENU ..................... 35 Input assignment, INPUT MENU ................................ 35 Input channel indicators ........................................... 7, 22 INPUT key, Front panel ................................................. 6 INPUT MENU ............................................................. 35 INPUT RENAME, INPUT MENU .............................. 35 Input rename, INPUT MENU ...................................... 35 Input selector keys, Remote control ............................... 9 Input signal information display .................................. 29 Input source setting configuration ................................ 28 Installing batteries, remote control ............................... 14 IntelliBeam ................................................................... 15 INTELLIBEAM key, Remote control ........................... 9 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack ............................................. 6 iPod Interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36 iPod interlock, Wireless setup ...................................... 36 iPod, troubleshooting ................................................... 42 iPod/iPhone playback ................................................... 27 IR IN terminal ................................................................ 8 IR-OUT terminal ............................................................ 8 ■ J Jazz Club. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23 ■ L LANGUAGE SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................... 37 Language setup, DISPLAY MENU ............................. 37 LFE 0.1-channel, glossary ............................................ 44 LFE Level, Sound output ............................................. 35 LFE LEVEL, Subwoofer settings ................................ 33 Linear PCM, glossary ................................................... 44 Loading settings ........................................................... 19 Low-frequency effect level for PRE OUT, Sound output . 35 Low-frequency effect level, Subwoofer settings ......... 33 ■ M MANUAL SETUP ....................................................... 31 MAX VOLUME SET, ADVANCED SETUP ............. 37 Maximum volume setting, ADVANCED SETUP ....... 37 Mch Stereo. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23 MEMORY PROTECT, ADVANCED SETUP ........... 38 Memory protect, ADVANCED SETUP ...................... 38 MENU key, controlling external component ............... 39 MENU key, Remote control .......................................... 9 MOVIE. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23 Movie. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 Multi-information display .............................................. 7 MUSIC ENHANCER, SOUND SET MENU .............. 34 Music Video. CINEMA DSP program ........................ 23 MUSIC. CINEMA DSP program ................................ 23 ■ N Numeric keys, controlling external component .......... 39 Numeric keys, Remote control ...................................... 9 ■ O ■ P ■ R R.INPUT POWER, ADVANCED SETUP ................. 38 Rack using, installation ............................................... 10 Radio Data System tuning ........................................... 26 Rear panel ...................................................................... 8 RECV, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7 Remote control .............................................................. 9 Remote control code list .............................................. 45 Remote control code resetting all ................................ 39 Remote control code setting ........................................ 39 Remote control preparation ......................................... 14 Remote control sensor ................................................... 6 Remote control, troubleshooting ................................. 41 Resetting all remote control code ................................ 39 Resolution, input signal information ........................... 29 RETURN key, controlling external component .......... 39 RETURN key, Remote control ..................................... 9 RS-232C terminal .......................................................... 8 ■ S T Table top stand/floor stand using, installation ............. 10 Talk Show. CINEMA DSP program ........................... 23 TONE CONTROL, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33 Tone control, SOUND SET MENU ............................ 33 TOP MENU key, controlling external component ...... 39 TOP MENU key, Remote control .................................. 9 Transmission indicator, Remote control ........................ 9 TREBLE, Tone control ................................................ 33 Treble, Tone control .................................................... 33 TRNS, Wireless indicators ............................................ 7 Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40 Tuner indicators ............................................................. 7 Tuner operation keys, Remote control ........................... 9 TURN ON VOLUME, ADVANCED SETUP ............ 37 TV ................................................................................ 33 TV button, Remote control ............................................ 9 TV connection .............................................................. 12 TV INPUT key, controlling external component ........ 39 TV key, controlling external component ..................... 39 TV MUTE key, controlling external component ......... 39 TV operation keys, Remote control ............................... 9 TV VOL +/– key, controlling external component ...... 39 TV, Audio delay .......................................................... 33 ■ U UNIT SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ............................... 37 Unit setup, DISPLAY MENU ..................................... 37 UNIVOLUME indicator ................................................ 7 UNIVOLUME key, Remote control .............................. 9 ■ SETTINGS V VIDEO jacks .................................................................. 8 Video Signal In, input signal information ................... 29 VOLUME +/– keys, Front panel ................................... 6 VOLUME +/– keys, Remote control ............................. 9 Volume level at power-on, ADVANCED SETUP ...... 37 Volume level indicator ................................................... 7 Volume Trim, option menu ......................................... 29 Volume trim, option menu ........................................... 29 ■ W wall mount bracket using, installation ......................... 10 Wireless Function, Wireless setup ............................... 36 Wireless function, Wireless setup ................................ 36 Wireless indicators ......................................................... 7 WIRELESS SETUP, INPUT MENU .......................... 36 Wireless setup, INPUT MENU ................................... 36 ■ APPENDIX Sampling frequency, input signal information ............ 29 Saving settings ............................................................. 19 Sci-Fi. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 SET MENU ................................................................. 30 SET MENU operation ................................................. 31 Setting Loading ........................................................... 19 SETTING PARAMETERS, MANUAL SETUP ........ 31 Setting parameters, MANUAL SETUP ...................... 31 Setting remote control code ......................................... 39 Setting saving .............................................................. 19 SETUP key, Remote control ......................................... 9 SLEEP indicator ............................................................ 7 SLEEP key, Remote control .......................................... 9 Sleep timer ................................................................... 28 SOUND BEAM OUT CONFIG, SOUND OUT MENU . 34 Sound beam output configuration, SOUND OUT MENU 34 SOUND OUT MENU ................................................. 34 SOUND OUT, SOUND OUT MENU ........................ 34 Sound output redirection, Sound output ...................... 35 Sound output, SOUND OUT MENU .......................... 34 ■ PLAYBACK FEATURES PANEL INP.KEY, ADVANCED SETUP .................. 37 Parallel installation, placement .................................... 11 PCM indicator ............................................................... 7 PCM, glossary ............................................................. 44 Playback ...................................................................... 21 Playing back iPod/iPhone ............................................ 27 Power key, Ffront panel ................................................ 6 Power key, Remote control ........................................... 9 Power LED .................................................................... 6 Power-on by remote control input keys, ADVANCED SETUP .................................................................... 38 PRE OUT jacks ............................................................. 8 PRE OUT Volume, Sound output ............................... 35 PRE OUT volume, Sound output ................................ 35 Preset tuning, FM tuning ............................................. 25 PREPARATION Operation range, remote control .................................. 14 OPTION key, Remote control ....................................... 9 OSD BACK COLOR, OSD setup ............................... 37 OSD background color, OSD setup ............................ 37 OSD language change ................................................. 15 OSD SETUP, DISPLAY MENU ................................ 37 OSD setup, DISPLAY MENU .................................... 37 OSD SHIFT, OSD setup ............................................. 37 OSD shift, OSD setup ................................................. 37 SOUND SET MENU ................................................... 33 Specifications ............................................................... 44 Spectacle. CINEMA DSP program ............................. 23 Sports. CINEMA DSP program ................................... 23 ST+3BeamPlus2, beam mode ...................................... 24 Stand attachment, installation ...................................... 10 STANDARD DIMMER, Front panel display setup .... 36 Standard dimmer, Front panel display setup ............... 36 Standby after AC on, ADVANCED SETUP ............... 38 STEREO key, Remote control ....................................... 9 Stereo+3Beam, beam mode ......................................... 23 Subwoofer connection ................................................. 14 SUBWOOFER jack ....................................................... 8 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack .................................... 38 SUBWOOFER SET, SOUND SET MENU ................ 33 Subwoofer settings, SOUND SET MENU .................. 33 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI setup ................................ 36 Support audio, HDMI setup ......................................... 36 SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks ...................................... 38 SUR.DECODE key, Remote control ............................. 9 SURROUND key, Remote control ................................ 9 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ..................................... 38 System configurations .................................................. 37 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal ................................ 8 System memory using .................................................. 19 INTRODUCTION Music. CINEMA DSP program .................................. 23 MUTE key, Remote control .......................................... 9 Muting audio output .................................................... 21 X x.v.Color, glossary ....................................................... 44 53 En © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. YC174B0/OMEN2